WO2015039298A1 - Multiple input multiple output signal processing method, apparatus and base station - Google Patents
Multiple input multiple output signal processing method, apparatus and base station Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2015039298A1 WO2015039298A1 PCT/CN2013/083757 CN2013083757W WO2015039298A1 WO 2015039298 A1 WO2015039298 A1 WO 2015039298A1 CN 2013083757 W CN2013083757 W CN 2013083757W WO 2015039298 A1 WO2015039298 A1 WO 2015039298A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- phase
- value
- combination
- optimal
- lock
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000003672 processing method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 9
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 88
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 63
- 238000013507 mapping Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 6
- 238000011002 quantification Methods 0.000 claims abstract 2
- 238000012549 training Methods 0.000 claims description 173
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 claims description 75
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 claims description 29
- 230000005012 migration Effects 0.000 claims description 26
- 238000013508 migration Methods 0.000 claims description 26
- 238000013139 quantization Methods 0.000 claims description 11
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 36
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 18
- 238000001914 filtration Methods 0.000 description 9
- 238000007781 pre-processing Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000004140 cleaning Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000006855 networking Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000005526 G1 to G0 transition Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000015556 catabolic process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006731 degradation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009191 jumping Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000737 periodic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000010287 polarization Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006467 substitution reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
- H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
- H04B7/0413—MIMO systems
- H04B7/0456—Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting
- H04B7/046—Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting taking physical layer constraints into account
- H04B7/0465—Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting taking physical layer constraints into account taking power constraints at power amplifier or emission constraints, e.g. constant modulus, into account
Definitions
- the present invention relates to the field of wireless communication technologies, and in particular, to a multiple input multiple output (MIMO) signal processing method, apparatus, and base station.
- MIMO multiple input multiple output
- WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
- HSDPA High Speed Downlink Packet Access
- VAM Virtual Antenna Mapping
- Embodiments of the present invention provide a MIMO signal processing method, apparatus, and base station, which can improve MIMO performance.
- a MIMO signal processing method including: performing a corresponding column phase rotation on m virtual antenna signals in the n virtual antenna signals to obtain m first rotation signals, where The virtual antenna signal is obtained by multiplying the MIMO signal by a precoding matrix.
- n, m is an integer, and l ⁇ m ⁇ n; multiply the virtual antenna signals and the m first rotation signals that are not subjected to the phase rotation of the column, and multiply the virtual antenna mapping matrix of nxn to obtain n output signals.
- n output signals are used to obtain n physical antenna signals.
- the performing the corresponding column phase rotation on the m virtual antenna signals in the n virtual antenna signals comprises: multiplying the m virtual antenna signals by ⁇ , Where e c is the column phase corresponding to the m virtual antenna signals, and c is the sequence number of the virtual antenna signal, c E [l, m ].
- the method before performing the corresponding column phase rotation on the m virtual antenna signals in the n virtual antenna signals, the method further includes: determining The selection state of e e , the selected state of e e includes a locked state and an unlocked state; when it is determined that the selected state of e c is an unlocked state, the selection phase of determining e c is a training phase; or when determining the selection state of e c When the state is locked, the selection phase of determining ⁇ ⁇ is an alternate training phase and a working phase; wherein, the corresponding column phase rotations of the m virtual antenna signals in the n virtual antenna signals include: according to ⁇ . In the selection phase, the column phase rotation is performed.
- performing the column phase rotation according to the selection phase of the e c includes: periodically updating the value of the e c in the training phase And perform column phase rotation according to the updated e c ; use a fixed e c for column phase rotation during at least part of the working phase.
- the method further comprises: obtaining, in the training phase, each updated ⁇ .
- the MIMO user equipment corresponds to the reported single stream channel quality indicator CQI; the optimal column phase is obtained according to the single stream CQI reported by the user equipment; when the training phase expires, whether the selection state transition is performed according to the optimal column phase.
- the optimal column phase is obtained according to the single-flow CQI reported by the user equipment, including: the single-flow CQI acquired under the current 0 C Performing a summation to obtain a first sum value, counting a single stream CQI obtained under current ⁇ ⁇ to obtain a first count value; obtaining a current lock performance value and a lock loss performance value according to the first sum value and the first count value; After traversing all, the e c with the largest lock performance value is determined as the optimal column phase.
- the current lock performance value and the lock loss performance value are obtained according to the first sum value and the first count value, including: The first average value is divided by the first count value to obtain a first average value; the first average value is preprocessed to obtain a lock performance value and a lockout performance value.
- the first average value is preprocessed to obtain a lock performance value and a lock loss performance value, including: performing Alpha filtering on the first average value Get the lock performance value and the lockout performance value.
- determining whether to perform the migration of the selection state according to the optimal column phase includes: if the current selection state is Loss-locked state: When the optimal column phase lock performance value is not lower than the sum of the average of all the lock performance values and the first threshold and the optimal column phase loss-lock performance value is not lower than all e c lock-loss performance When the average of the value is equal to the second threshold, determining that the selected state transitions from the unlocked state to the locked state; when the locking performance value of the optimal column phase is lower than the sum of the average of all the locking performance values and the first threshold or When the optimal column phase loss-lock performance value is lower than the sum of the average of all the lock-loss performance values and the second threshold, it is determined that the selected state does not migrate; or, if the current selected state is the locked state: when the optimal column phase The loss-locking performance value is lower than the sum of the average value of all the
- the value of the fixed e c used in the next working phase is determined according to the optimal column phase, including: when the optimal column phase When the difference between the fixed e c used in the previous working phase is greater than the fourth threshold, the optimal column phase is used as the fixed e c used in the next working phase; otherwise the fixed used in the previous working phase will be used. a fixed e c e c used in the next session.
- the optimal column phase is used as the fixed e c used in the next working phase, including: an initial period of time in the next working phase Internally, the column phase is gradually changed from the column phase end update value of the training phase to the optimal column phase.
- the method further includes: when the working phase expires, entering the training phase.
- entering the training phase includes: gradually stepping the phase in the initial period of the training phase From the fixed e c used in the work phase to the initial phase of the train phase The value is updated.
- the method further includes: performing k phase rotation on the k output signals of the n output signals to obtain k first Two rotation signals, where k is a positive integer; power processing is performed on nk output signals and k second rotation signals that are not phase-rotated to obtain n physical antenna signals.
- the k output signals of the n output signals are subjected to respective row phase rotations, including: k output signals Multiply with ⁇ , where ⁇ is the line phase corresponding to the k output signals, r is the sequence number of the virtual antenna signal, r E [ l , k].
- the method further includes: determining a selection state of ⁇ e e , ej combination, ⁇ e e , the selected state of the combination includes a locked state And the unlocked state; when it is determined that the selection state of the ⁇ e e , ej combination is the unlocked state, it is determined that the selection phase of the ⁇ e e , ej combination is the training phase; or when it is determined that the selected selection state is the locked state,
- the selection phase of the combination of ⁇ ⁇ is an alternating training phase and a working phase, wherein column phase rotation and row phase rotation are performed according to the selection phase of the ⁇ ⁇ combination.
- the column phase rotation and the row phase rotation are performed according to the combined selection phase, including: periodically updating the ⁇ in the training phase ⁇ ⁇ combination of values, and column phase rotation and row phase rotation according to the updated ⁇ ⁇ combination; column phase rotation using a fixed ⁇ e c , ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ combination for at least part of the working phase And the line phase rotation.
- the method further includes: acquiring, in the training phase, the updated report corresponding to the user equipment of the ⁇ combination
- the channel quality indicator indicates CQI; the optimal ⁇ e e , e r ⁇ combination is obtained according to the single stream CQI reported by the MIMO user equipment; when the training phase expires, whether to select according to the optimal ⁇ e e , e r ⁇ combination is determined. Migration of status.
- the optimal column phase is obtained according to the single-stream CQI corresponding to the MIMO user equipment, including: the current ⁇ 0 C , e r ⁇
- the single stream cQi obtained under the combination is summed to obtain a second sum value for the current ⁇ .
- the single stream CQI obtained by the combination is counted to obtain a second count value; the current combined lock performance value and the lock loss performance value are obtained according to the second sum value and the second count value; after traversing all the combinations, all ⁇ 0 C are obtained , the ⁇ combination with the largest locking performance value in the combination is determined as the optimal group Hehe.
- the current ⁇ , combined locking performance value and the loss-of-lock performance value are obtained according to the second sum value and the second count value, including: The second average value is divided by the second count value to obtain a second average value; the second average value is preprocessed to obtain a lock performance value and a lockout performance value.
- the second average value is preprocessed to obtain a locking performance value and a lockout performance value, including: performing Alpha on the second average value Filtering yields lock performance values and loss of lock performance values.
- the combination determines whether to perform the migration of the selected state, including:
- the current selection state is the unlocked state:
- the optimal ⁇ the combined locking performance value is not lower than all ⁇
- the sum of the average of the combined locking performance values and the first threshold and the optimal column phase of the lost lock performance value is not lower than all ⁇ , e r ⁇ combinations
- the average value of the loss-of-lock performance value is equal to the second threshold, it is determined that the selected state transitions from the unlocked state to the locked state; when the optimal ⁇ , the combined locking performance value is lower than all ⁇ , the average of the combined locking performance values
- the sum of the value and the first threshold or the optimal ⁇ , the combined loss-of-lock performance value is lower than the sum of the average value of the lock-loss performance values of all ⁇ , e r ⁇ combinations and the second threshold, determining that the selected state does not migrate; , if the current selection state is locked:
- the optimal ⁇ combined loss-of-lock performance value is lower than all ⁇ , the sum of the average value of the combined loss-of-lock performance value and the third threshold, it is determined that the selected state migrates from the locked state to the unlocked state; c , the combined loss-of-lock performance value is not lower than all ⁇ , the sum of the average value of the combined loss-of-lock performance value and the third threshold, determining that the selected state does not migrate, and determining according to the optimal ⁇ e e , e r ⁇ combination The value of the fixed ⁇ combination used in a working phase.
- the fixed ⁇ e c the combined value used in the next working phase is determined according to the optimal ⁇ e c , the combination , including:
- the optimal ⁇ e c , ej combination and the fixed ⁇ e c , ej combination used in the previous working phase are greater than the fourth threshold, the optimal ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ is combined as the next The fixed ⁇ e c , combination used in the work phase; otherwise the fixed ⁇ e c used in the previous work phase is combined as the fixed ⁇ e c , e r ⁇ combination used in the next work phase.
- the value range of the column phase is smaller than the value range of the row phase and the quantization precision of the column phase is greater than the row phase The quantization precision of the bit.
- a MIMO signal processing apparatus including: a first rotating unit, configured to perform corresponding column phase rotation on m virtual antenna signals in the n virtual antenna signals, to obtain m first a rotation signal, wherein the virtual antenna signal is obtained by multiplying a MIMO signal by a precoding matrix, n, m is an integer, and l ⁇ m ⁇ n; a first matrix unit for nm that does not perform column phase rotation
- the virtual antenna signals and the m first rotation signals are multiplied by the virtual antenna mapping matrix of nxn to obtain n output signals, and the n output signals are used to obtain n physical antenna signals.
- the first rotating unit is specifically configured to multiply the m virtual antenna signals by ⁇ , where e c is a column phase corresponding to the m virtual antenna signals , c is the serial number of the virtual antenna signal, c E [l , m ].
- the MIMO signal processing apparatus further includes a first determining unit for determining ⁇ .
- the selected states include a locked state and an unlocked state.
- the first determining unit is also used to determine ⁇ .
- the selection phase of e e is determined to be the training phase; or when it is determined that the selected state of e e is the locked state, ⁇ is determined.
- the selection phase is an alternating training phase and work phase.
- the first rotating unit is specifically configured to perform column phase rotation according to a selection phase of e c .
- the first rotating unit is specifically configured to periodically update the value of e c in the training phase, and follow the updated e c performs column phase rotation; at least part of the working phase, the column phase rotation is performed using a fixed e c .
- the MIMO signal processing apparatus further includes: a first acquisition unit, configured to acquire each updated ⁇ in the training phase.
- the MIMO user equipment corresponds to the reported single stream channel quality indication CQI; and the optimal column phase is obtained according to the single stream CQI reported by the MIMO user equipment; and the second determining unit is configured to: according to the optimal column phase when the training phase expires Determine whether to perform a migration of the selected state.
- the first acquiring unit is specifically configured to use the current ⁇ .
- the obtained single stream CQI is summed to obtain a first sum value, and the currently obtained single stream CQI is counted to obtain a first count value; the current lock performance value and the lock loss are obtained according to the first sum value and the first count value.
- Performance value; after traversing all, all ⁇ will be.
- the ⁇ with the highest performance value is locked. Determined to be the optimal column phase.
- the first acquiring unit is configured to: divide the first sum value by the first count value to obtain a first average value; The values are preprocessed to obtain lock performance values and lockout performance values.
- the second determining unit is specifically configured to: when the optimal column phase has a low locking performance value Determining the selection state from the sum of the average of all the locking performance values and the first threshold and the loss of the optimal column phase is not lower than the sum of the average of all the loss-of-lock performance values and the second threshold.
- the lock state transitions to the locked state; when the lock performance value of the optimal column phase is lower than the sum of the average value of the lock performance values of all e c and the first threshold or the loss of the optimal column phase is lower than all e c
- the second determining unit is specifically configured to use the low-locking performance value of the optimal column phase Determining the selected state transitions from the locked state to the unlocked state when the sum of the average of the loss-of-lock performance values is equal to the third threshold; when the optimal column phase loss-locking performance value is not lower than all the loss-locking performance values Average and When three and the threshold value, the selected state is determined not to migrate, a fixed value of e c next phase column used according to the optimum phase is determined.
- the second determining unit is specifically configured to use the difference between the optimal column phase and the fixed e c used in the previous working phase.
- the optimal column phase is used as the fixed e c used in the next working phase; otherwise, the fixed e c used in the previous working phase is used as the fixed 0 C used in the next working phase.
- the MIMO signal processing apparatus further includes: a second rotation unit, configured to perform k output signals of the n output signals The row phase is rotated to obtain k second rotation signals, where k is a positive integer; wherein nk output signals and k second rotation signals for which phase rotation is not performed are taken as n physical antenna signals.
- the second rotation unit is specifically configured to multiply the k output signals by ⁇ , where is a row corresponding to the k output signals Phase, r is the sequence number of the virtual antenna signal, r E [l , k].
- the third determining unit is further configured to determine a selection state of the ⁇ e c , e r ⁇ combination, and according to ⁇ e c , the selection state of the combination of e r ⁇ determines a selection phase of the combination of ⁇ e r ⁇ , wherein the first rotation unit is combined according to ⁇ e r ⁇ The selection phase performs column phase rotation, and the second rotation unit performs line phase rotation according to the selected phase of ⁇ 0 C .
- the selected state of the combination of ⁇ 0 , e r ⁇ includes a locked state and an unlocked state
- the third determining unit is specifically configured to determine the selection phase of the ⁇ combination when determining ⁇ 0 and the selected state of the combination is the unlocked state
- the training phase when it is determined that the selection state of the ⁇ e e , ej combination is the locked state, it is determined that the selection phase of the ⁇ e e , ej combination is an alternate training phase and a working phase.
- the first rotating unit is specifically configured to periodically update the combined value in the training phase, and follow the updated combination.
- the second rotation unit is specifically for periodically updating the combination during the training phase Take values and perform phase rotation according to the updated ⁇ ⁇ combination; or use a fixed ⁇ e c , combination for phase rotation at least part of the working phase.
- the second acquiring unit is further configured to acquire, in the training phase, each updated ⁇ combination
- the MIMO user equipment corresponds to the reported single stream channel quality indication CQI, and obtains an optimal combination according to the single stream CQI reported by the MIMO user equipment.
- the third determining unit is configured to determine whether to perform according to the optimal combination when the training phase expires. Select the migration of the state.
- the second obtaining unit is specifically configured to obtain a second sum value by summing the single-flow CQIs obtained under the current ⁇ combination, Counting the single stream CQI obtained under the current ⁇ combination to obtain a second count value; obtaining the current ⁇ , combined lock performance value and the lock loss performance value according to the second sum value and the second count value; traversing all ⁇ , ⁇ After j is combined, the combination of ⁇ e r ⁇ with the highest locking performance value in all combinations is determined as the optimal e r ⁇ combination.
- the second obtaining unit is specifically configured to: divide the second sum value by the second count value to obtain a second average value; The average is preprocessed to obtain the lock performance value and the lockout performance value.
- the third determining unit is specifically configured to: when the optimal ⁇ , e r ⁇ combination has a locking performance value not lower than all ⁇ e c , ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ the sum of the average value of the combined locking performance value and the first threshold and the loss of the optimal column phase is not lower than the sum of all the values of the combined loss-of-lock performance value and the second threshold.
- the third determining unit is specifically configured to determine that the selected state is migrated from the locked state when the optimal unlocking performance value is lower than the sum of the average value of the unlocking performance values of all ⁇ , e r ⁇ combinations and the third threshold.
- the lockout performance value of the optimal combination is not lower than the sum of the average of the combined lockout performance value and the third threshold, it is determined that the selected state does not migrate, and the next combination is determined according to the optimal combination.
- the third determining unit is specifically configured to use the fixed ⁇ c , the combination and the fixed ⁇ used in the previous working phase. 0 , when the difference between the combinations is greater than the fourth threshold, the optimal ⁇ ⁇ is combined as the fixed ⁇ combination used in the next working phase; otherwise the fixed ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ used in the previous working phase will be used. ⁇ Combine as a fixed ⁇ combination used in the next session.
- a base station comprising the above multiple input and multiple output MIMO signal processing apparatus.
- the column phase rotation is performed on all or part of the virtual antenna signals subjected to PCI weighting, and the cascading manner of the PCI weighting and the column phase rotation is equivalent to expanding the PCI.
- the number of codebooks can correct the quantization accuracy problem caused by the restricted codebook and improve the MIMO performance.
- FIG. 1 is a flow chart of a MIMO signal processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 2 is a schematic timing diagram of a selected state of an embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of an example of an enhanced VAM scheme in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention.
- 4 is a schematic flow diagram of a method of performing optimal column phase selection in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of an example of an enhanced VAM scheme according to another embodiment of the present invention.
- Figure 6 is a schematic flow diagram of a method of performing optimal phase combination selection in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention.
- Figure 7 is a schematic flow diagram of a method of performing optimal phase combination selection in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 8 is a block diagram of a MIMO signal processing apparatus in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 9 is a block diagram of a MIMO signal processing apparatus according to another embodiment of the present invention. detailed description
- FIG. 1 is a flow chart of a MIMO signal processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- the method of Figure 1 can be performed by a base station.
- the virtual antenna signal is a signal that is input to the VAM after being weighted by PCI.
- MIMO devices are equipped with a PCI matrix module that performs PCI weighting on the signals that need to be transmitted.
- n-m virtual antenna signals and the m first rotation signals that are not phase-rotated and multiply the VAM matrix of nxn to obtain n output signals, and the n output signals are used to obtain n physical antenna signals.
- the m virtual antenna signals are rotated by the column phase to obtain m first rotation signals and are used as m inputs of the VAM matrix, and the remaining nm virtual antenna signals are directly rotated as the column phase and directly used as the other nm of the VAM matrix. Input.
- the VAM matrix has a total of n input signals.
- the n input signals are multiplied by the VAM matrix of nxn to obtain n output signals.
- VAM The matrix connecting the virtual antenna and the physical antenna is called a VAM matrix.
- VAM can usually be an orthogonal matrix (also called a unitary matrix when the elements in the matrix are complex).
- the PCI is added before the virtual antenna signal is multiplied by the VAM matrix. All or part of the virtual antenna signal is rotated in column phase. This cascading manner of PCI weighting and column phase rotation is equivalent to expanding the number of PCI codebooks, thereby being able to correct the quantization accuracy problem caused by the limited codebook. Improve MIMO performance.
- phase rotation before the VAM matrix corresponds to the column phase of the rotated MIMO signal, so it can be called column phase rotation.
- phase rotation after the VAM matrix corresponds to the line phase of the rotated MIMO signal, so it can be called line phase rotation.
- the m virtual antenna signals may be multiplied by ⁇ , where 0 e
- c is the sequence number of the virtual antenna signal, and c ⁇ [l,m] 0 e c may also be referred to as a column phase modulation factor.
- the column phase modulation factor and the PCI weighting factor inherent in the MIMO itself are directly cascaded (multiplied), and the cascading mode is It is equivalent to expanding the number of PCI codebooks, so that the quantization accuracy problem caused by the restricted codebook can be corrected.
- this codebook extension causes the physical antenna signals output by the antenna to produce different amplitude differences, that is, introduce some power amplifier imbalance. However, this imbalance is less unbalanced than the original 4-codebook PCI solution, which can result in a slight power amplifier imbalance for MIMO performance improvement.
- ⁇ may also be determined prior to step 101.
- the selected state wherein the selected state includes a locked state and an unlocked state.
- the selection phase can be determined according to the selection status of e c e c a. Specifically, when it is determined that the selected state of e e is an unlocked state, it is determined that the selection phase is a training phase; or, when it is determined that the selected state of e e is a locked state, determining that the selection phase is an alternate training Stage and work stage.
- the column phase rotation can be performed according to the selection phase of e c .
- the value range of e c may be narrow, but the quantization precision is high within the value range (ie, The value step is shorter).
- 0 e can be limited to ⁇ 30. Inside the window, but to 15.
- ie 9 c e [-30°, -15°, 0, 15°, 30°].
- the specific value range and the value step of the embodiment of the present invention are not limited.
- FIG. 2 is a schematic timing diagram of a selected state of an embodiment of the present invention.
- the embodiment of Figure 2 can be implemented by a state machine that migrates between a locked state and an unlocked state. As shown in Fig. 2, in the unlocked state, it indicates that the optimal e c changes drastically and cannot be locked, so the training phase can be repeated periodically to achieve a stable optimal e c .
- the selection phase of e c is an alternating training phase and working phase. It should be noted that the alternate manner of the training phase and the working phase in FIG. 2 is merely exemplary and not a limitation of the embodiments of the present invention. For example, after moving from the unlocked state to the locked state, it may enter the working phase first, or may enter the training phase first; or, before moving from the locked state to the unlocked state, the last selected phase of the locked state may be the working phase. It can also be a training phase.
- the duration of the work phase and the training phase can be fixed. In general, the duration of the working phase is longer than the duration of the training phase, but this embodiment of the invention does not limit this.
- the column phase rotation is performed in the training phase, the value of ⁇ ⁇ is periodically updated, and the column phase rotation is performed in accordance with the updated ⁇ ⁇ .
- the column phase rotation is performed using a fixed e c for at least part of the working phase. This fixed e c can be referred to as the optimal e c .
- the possible values of e c are sequentially traversed, so that the optimal decision can be made according to the feedback result of the UE.
- one kind of feedback result that can be used here is
- CQI Channel Quality Indication
- the column phase rotation according to the fixed e c can be forced into the training phase when the working phase expires.
- the optimal e c working phase it may become unsuitable, that is, it is no longer optimal, resulting in poor system performance.
- the training phase is forced to re-find the optimal e c , and even if such a problem occurs, the negative influence can be minimized.
- the optimal is not necessarily the last e c used before the work phase or not necessarily the first e c used after the work phase.
- the optimal column phase rotation is used immediately after entering the working phase, it may cause a sharp change in e c , which affects the stability of the system performance. Therefore, column phase rotation can be performed using only a fixed e c for part of the working phase, but for the rest of the working phase (eg, the initial period of the working phase and/or the period before the end) Phase continuity processing is used to reduce the impact of changes in e c on system performance.
- the column phase when the working phase enters the training phase, the column phase may be gradually changed from the fixed e e used in the working phase to the initial period of the training phase.
- the column phase initial update value is the initial starting value for traversing the column phase in the training phase, for example, may be the minimum or maximum of all possible e c values.
- the phase is gradually changed according to the small step size, instead of directly changing the e c to the initial update value of the column phase. This phase continuity processing can ensure the stability of the system performance as much as possible.
- the optimal phase may be determined according to a Channel Quality Indication (CQI) reported by the UE, for example, the phase at which the reported CQI is maximum is the optimal phase.
- CQI Channel Quality Indication
- each updated ⁇ is obtained.
- the optimal column phase is obtained according to the single-flow CQI corresponding to the reported MIMO user equipment.
- the single-stream CQI obtained under the current e c may be summed to obtain a first sum value, and the current sum is The single stream CQI acquired under ⁇ ⁇ is counted to obtain a first count value (ie, the first count value is equal to the number of single stream CQIs currently acquired). Then, the current lock performance value and the lockout performance value are obtained according to the first sum value and the first count value. After traversing all, the ⁇ ⁇ with the highest locking performance value in all e c is determined as the optimal column phase.
- the first sum value may be divided by the first count value to obtain the first An average value.
- the first average value may be set to zero.
- the first average value may be pre-processed (for example, subjected to Alpha filtering) to obtain the above-described lock performance value and lock-loss performance value.
- the migration of the selected state may be determined in the following manner. It should be noted that the following decision mode is only one embodiment of the present invention, if the current selection state is an unlocked state:
- the optimal column phase lock performance value is not lower than the sum of the average value of all the lock performance values and the first threshold value, and the optimal column phase lockout performance value is not lower than the average value of all the lockout performance values and the When the sum of the two thresholds is determined, it is determined that the selected state transitions from the unlocked state to the locked state; When the optimal column phase lock performance value is lower than the sum of the average of all the lock performance values and the first threshold or the optimal column phase lock loss performance value is lower than the average value and the second threshold of all the lockout performance values When the sum is selected, it is determined that the selection state is not migrated.
- the optimal column phase has a loss-locking performance value not lower than all ⁇ .
- the average value of the loss-of-lock performance value is equal to the third threshold, it is determined that the selected state is not migrated, and the fixed ⁇ value used in the next working phase is determined according to the optimal column phase.
- the optimal column phase and the fixed e c used in the previous working phase are When the difference is greater than the fourth threshold, the optimal column phase is used as the fixed e c used in the next working phase; otherwise, the fixed e c used in the previous working phase is used as the fixed in the next working phase. E c .
- the column phase when the optimal column phase is used as the fixed e c used in the next working phase, the column phase may be gradually stepped from the training during the initial period of the next working phase.
- the column phase end update value of the phase changes to the optimal column phase.
- the column phase end update value is the last value that traverses the column phase in the training phase, for example, may be the maximum or minimum of all possible e c values.
- the phase is gradually changed according to the small step size, instead of directly changing the e c to the optimal column phase. This phase continuity processing can ensure the stability of the system performance as much as possible.
- FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of an example of an enhanced VAM scheme in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention.
- the form of the VAM matrix is a second-order orthogonal real matrix, but the embodiment of the present invention does not limit the form of the VAM matrix.
- n 2
- n 2
- FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a two-antenna VAM architecture used in the MIMO and HSDPA co-carrier networking in the primary tuner mode.
- the entire SS-MIMO signal includes DS-MIM01 and DS-MIM02.
- the weighting of DS-MIMO1 and DS-MIM02 is cascaded through PCI matrix 301 and VAM matrix 302 carry out.
- the input port of the VAM matrix 302 is referred to as a virtual antenna, that is, the first virtual antenna 303 and the second virtual antenna 304 shown in FIG.
- the signals input on the respective virtual antennas are referred to as virtual antenna signals, such as VI and V2 shown in FIG. VI is based on HSDPA signal, DS-MIM01 signal, Primary Common Pilot Channel (P-CPICH) and common (Common) channel; V2 is based on DS-MIM02 signal and secondary common pilot channel (Second Common Pilot Channel) , S-CPICH ) bear
- the virtual antenna signal V2 on the second virtual antenna 304 is phase rotated, i.e., multiplied by e ⁇ , where 0e is the corresponding column phase.
- the VAM matrix 302 multiplies all of the virtual antenna signals (including the VI that has not undergone phase rotation of the column and the rotation signal obtained by phase-rotating V2) by the orthogonal VAM matrix, thereby obtaining two output signals. After the two output signals pass through the power amplifiers PA1 and PA2, they are transmitted as physical antenna signals S1 and S2 through the two antennas 311 and 312, respectively.
- the VAM matrix may have various forms, and is not limited to the specific examples described above.
- the column phase modulation factor ⁇ ⁇ determines the polarization form of the transmitted signal.
- the optimal column phase is related to the placement position of the UE and the wireless environment. Therefore, the optimal phase of different UEs in the cell is different, so it can be adjusted.
- the periodic rotation of the phase improves the performance of SS-MIMO.
- FIG. 4 is a schematic flow diagram of a method of performing optimal column phase selection in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention.
- the method of Figure 4 can be applied to the VAM architecture shown in Figure 3.
- the column phase timer is reset to zero.
- the single-flow CQI of the MIMO user is summed and counted, and CqiSum[i] and CqiCounter[i] are respectively used.
- ProcPrdTimer ProcPrd
- the (i+1)th column phase training phase expires, and step 406 is continued. Otherwise, the training phase has not expired and jumps to step 404.
- ProcPrd is the length of the training phase.
- StoC ⁇ ZocWi] is the above lock performance value
- C ⁇ [i] is the above-mentioned lockout performance value.
- a lock is used to quickly track the change of the optimal column phase to trigger the migration from the lock state to the unlocked state, and collect the training samples faster; a lock is used to accurately select the optimal phase of the lock, and Joint a unlock to trigger the migration of the lock-up state to the lock state.
- the transition process from the lock state to the lock-up state and the transition state of the lock-up state to the lock state are as described above. To avoid repetition, details are not described herein again.
- the maximum value is determined from the N StaCqi ckli values obtained as described above, and the column phase corresponding to the index value of the maximum value is taken as the column phase corresponding to the optimal performance, which is called the optimal column phase. Assuming that the maximum value is StaCqilock[n and n is 0 ⁇ (N-1), then n is the index value, and the corresponding (n+1)th column phase is the optimal column phase.
- the optimal column phase that can be matched. For example, determine whether the optimal performance StoC ⁇ tocWn] is not lower than Mean(StaCqilock[i]) + ThreshA , where Mi3 ⁇ 4m03 ⁇ 4 ⁇ 2(3 ⁇ 4 tod [ ]) is the average of the N StaCqilock[i] obtained in the foregoing, ThreshA Is the preset threshold.
- Lockflag 1 , it is determined according to the set optimal phase lock rule whether it needs to jump out of the lock state. For example, whether the optimal performance StaCqiunlock[n] is not lower than Mean(StaCqiunlock[i]) + ThreshC , where Meim toG ⁇ toc ]) is the average of the N StaCqiunlock[i] obtained in the foregoing, and ThreshC is the default. Threshold.
- the optimal performance StaCqiim ckln] is not lower than (average + threshold)
- the above optimal column phase locking rule may be, for example, comparing the performance of the new column phase with the performance of the optimal column phase used in the previous working phase, and performing the most when the comparison difference is greater than a preset threshold value.
- the phase is updated, otherwise the optimal column phase is not updated. It should be understood that any phase continuity processing performed during the optimal column phase update phase for performance considerations also falls within the scope of protection of embodiments of the present invention.
- WorkPrdTimer WorkPrd
- it is ready to jump out of the fixed column phase, and enter the training phase process, that is, jump to step 401. Otherwise, proceed to step 411.
- WorkPrd is the length of the work phase.
- the column phase rotation is performed on all or part of the virtual antenna signals subjected to PCI weighting.
- This cascading mode is equivalent to expanding the number of PCI codebooks, thereby enabling Correct the quantization accuracy problem caused by the restricted codebook and improve the MIMO performance h
- corresponding k phase rotations may be performed on the k output signals.
- the k output signals of the n output signals are subjected to corresponding row phase rotation to obtain k second rotation signals, where k is a positive integer.
- the n-k output signals and the k second rotation signals that are not phase-rotated are subjected to power amplifier processing to obtain n physical antenna signals.
- Such a line phase rotation enables a phase difference between at least two of the n physical antenna signals.
- the k output signals may be multiplied by ⁇ , where, for the k outputs The corresponding line phase of the signal, r is the sequence number of the virtual antenna signal, rE [l, k].
- a selection state of a combination of ⁇ ⁇ , e r ⁇ may be determined, where the selected state of the ⁇ e e , ej combination includes a locked state and an unlocked state.
- the combined selection state determines the selection phase of ⁇ e e , ej combination. Specifically, when it is determined that the selection state of the ⁇ e e , ej combination is the unlocked state, the selection phase of the combination is determined as the training phase; when it is determined that the selected state of the combination of ⁇ e c , e r ⁇ is the locked state, determining ⁇ The selection phase of the combination is the alternating training phase 0 segment and the working phase. In this case, when the corresponding column phase rotation is performed on the m virtual antenna signals of the n virtual antenna signals in step 101, the line phase rotation may be performed according to the selection phase of ⁇ e e . Similarly, when the corresponding line phase rotation is performed on the k output signals of the n output signals, the column phase rotation can be performed according to the selection phase of the ⁇ combination.
- the combined value is periodically updated, and according to the update
- the ⁇ , combination performs column phase rotation and row phase rotation.
- Column phase rotation and row phase rotation are performed using a fixed combination for at least part of the working phase. This fixed combination is the optimal combination.
- the possible values of the ⁇ e r ⁇ combination are traversed in order, so that the optimal ⁇ combination can be determined according to the feedback result of the UE.
- the duration of the training phase is fixed, the above decision can be performed at the end of the training phase, which is convenient to implement. If in training At the end of the segment, the optimal combination cannot be determined. Then, according to the ⁇ 0 used in the previous working phase, the next working phase can be combined, or it may be necessary to migrate to the unlocked state to continue training to obtain a stable optimal combination.
- the phase phase rotation is performed according to the fixed ⁇ e c , ej combination until the working phase expires, and the training phase can be forced.
- the optimal combination work phase it may become unsuitable, that is, it is no longer optimal, resulting in poor system performance.
- the training phase is forced to re-find the optimal ⁇ e c , combination, and even if such a problem occurs, the negative influence can be minimized.
- each updated ⁇ 0 C , ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ combination may be used to obtain a single stream channel quality indication CQI corresponding to the user equipment.
- the optimal ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ combination is obtained according to the single-flow CQI reported by the MIMO user equipment.
- the combination determines whether to perform the migration of the selected state.
- the optimal column phase when the optimal column phase is obtained according to the single-flow CQI corresponding to the MIMO user equipment, the current single-stream CQI obtained by the current ⁇ combination is summed to obtain a second total value, and the current sum is The single-flow CQI obtained under the combination of ⁇ , ⁇ is counted to obtain a second count value.
- the current ⁇ , combined locking performance value and the lost lock performance value are obtained according to the second sum value and the second count value.
- the combination of ⁇ e c , e r ) that maximizes the lock performance value of all combinations is determined as the optimal combination.
- the second sum value may be divided by the second count value.
- Second average when the second count value is 0, the second average value may be set to zero.
- the second average may be pre-processed (e.g., alpha-filtered) to obtain a lock performance value and a lock-loss performance value.
- whether to perform the migration of the selected state may be determined according to the following manner. It should be noted that the following decision mode is only one implementation of the present invention. If the current selection state is an unlocked state:
- the optimal ⁇ the combined locking performance value is not lower than all ⁇ , the sum of the average of the combined locking performance values and the first threshold and the optimal column phase unlocking performance value is not lower than all ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ combinations
- the average value of the loss-of-lock performance value is equal to the second threshold, it is determined that the selected state transitions from the unlocked state to the locked state;
- the optimal ⁇ the combined locking performance value is lower than all ⁇ , the sum of the combined locking performance value and the first threshold or the optimal ⁇ , the combined loss-of-lock performance value is lower than all ⁇ , e r ⁇ combinations
- the average value of the lockout performance value is equal to the second threshold, it is determined that the selected state does not migrate;
- the combined loss-of-lock performance value is lower than the sum of all ⁇ , the combined average value of the lost lock performance value and the third threshold, determining that the selected state transitions from the locked state to the unlocked state;
- the optimal ⁇ e c when the fixed ⁇ e c , the combined value used in the next working phase is determined according to the optimal combination, when the optimal ⁇ e c , the combination and the previous working phase are used Fixed ⁇ e e , when the difference between the combinations is greater than the fourth threshold, the optimal ⁇ e e , combination is used as the fixed ⁇ combination used in the next work phase; otherwise it will be fixed in the previous work phase ⁇ e c , the combination is used as the fixed ⁇ combination used in the next working phase.
- the range of values of the column phase may be smaller than the range of values of the row phase.
- the specific value range and the value step of the embodiment of the present invention are not limited.
- FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of an example of an enhanced VAM scheme according to another embodiment of the present invention.
- the form of the VAM matrix is a first-order orthogonal real matrix, but the embodiment of the present invention does not limit the form of the VAM matrix.
- n 2
- n 2
- FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a two-antenna VAM architecture used in MIMO and HSDPA co-carrier networking in the primary tuner mode.
- the entire SS-MIMO signal includes DS-MIM01 and DS-MIM02, and the weighting is completed by cascading the PCI matrix 501 and the VAM matrix 502.
- the input port of the VAM matrix 502 is referred to as a virtual antenna, that is, the first virtual antenna 503 and the second virtual antenna 504 shown in FIG.
- the signals input on the respective virtual antennas are referred to as virtual antenna signals, such as VI and V2 shown in FIG. VI is based on HSDPA signal, DS-MIM01 signal, Primary Common Pilot Channel (P-CPICH) and common (Common) channel; V2 is based on DS-MIM02 letter Number and Secondary Common Pilot Channel (S-CPICH).
- the virtual antenna signal V2 on the second virtual antenna 504 is phase rotated, i.e., multiplied by e ⁇ , where 0e is the corresponding column phase.
- the VAM matrix 502 multiplies all the virtual antenna signals (including the VI that has not undergone phase rotation of the column, and the rotation signal obtained after the column phase rotation of V2) by the orthogonal VAM matrix, thereby obtaining two output signals 01 and 02.
- an output signal 02 of the output VAM matrix is phase rotated, i.e., multiplied, where 0 R is the corresponding line phase.
- 01 and 02 after the phase rotation of the line pass through the power amplifiers PA1 and PA2, respectively, and then are transmitted as the physical antenna signals S1 and S2 through the two antennas 511 and 512, respectively.
- VAM matrix may have various forms, and is not limited to the specific examples described above.
- 6 is a schematic flow chart of a method for performing optimal phase combination selection according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- the method of FIG. 6 can be applied to the VAM architecture shown in FIG.
- phase combination timer is reset to zero.
- the single-stream CQI reported by the MIMO user is summed and counted, and recorded as C ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4m[i] and (3 ⁇ 4 Co er[i], respectively.
- ProcPrdTimer ProcPrd
- the (i+1)th phase combination training phase expires, and step 606 is continued. Otherwise, the training phase has not expired and jumps to step 604.
- ProcPrd is the length of the training phase.
- StaCqi ck[i] is the above locking performance value
- C ⁇ [i] is the above-mentioned loss-of-lock performance value.
- a unlock > a lock is used to quickly track the optimal column phase change to trigger Locking state to unlocked state migration, collecting training samples faster; a lock is used to accurately select the optimal phase of the lock, and combined with a unlock to trigger the migration from the unlocked state to the locked state. Specifically, the locked state is lost.
- the migration state of the lock state and the transition process from the lock-up state to the lock state are as described above. To avoid repetition, details are not described herein.
- the maximum value is determined from the above-mentioned StoC ⁇ ZocWi] values, and the phase combination corresponding to the index value of the maximum value is taken as the phase combination corresponding to the optimal performance, which is called the optimal phase combination. Assume the maximum is If the value of n is 0 ⁇ ( ⁇ -1), then ⁇ is the index value, and the corresponding (n+1)th phase combination d, U is the optimal phase combination.
- Lockflag 0, it is determined according to the set optimal column phase locking rule whether to lock the optimal column phase corresponding to the optimal performance. For example, determine whether the optimal performance StoC ⁇ ZocWn] is not inconsistent with Mean(StaCqilock[i]) + ThreshA , where Mi3 ⁇ 4m03 ⁇ 4 ⁇ 2(3 ⁇ 4 tod [ ]) is the average of the N StaCqilock[i] obtained in the foregoing, ThreshA Is the preset threshold.
- Lockflag 1 , it is determined according to the set optimal phase lock rule whether it needs to jump out of the lock state. For example, whether the optimal performance StaCqiunlock[n] is not lower than Mean(StaCqiunlock[i]) + ThreshC , where Meim toG ⁇ /ocfc['']) is the average value of the N StaCqiunlock[i] obtained in the foregoing, ThreshC is the preset threshold.
- the optimal performance StoC ⁇ ⁇ 0( [ ⁇ ] is not lower than (average + threshold)
- Phase combination The above optimal column phase locking rule can be: for example, comparing the performance of the new phase combination with the performance of the optimal phase combination used in the previous working phase, when the comparison difference is greater than a preset threshold
- the optimal phase combination update is performed, otherwise, the optimal phase combination is not updated. It should be understood that any phase continuity processing performed in the optimal phase combination update phase for performance considerations also falls within the scope of protection of the embodiments of the present invention. .
- WorkPrdTimer WorkPrd
- WorkPrd is the length of the work phase. It should be understood that due to the optimal phase combination and the initial setting of the initial The phase combination may be different, and any phase combination continuity processing performed when shifting from the fixed phase combination of the working phase to the training phase for performance considerations also falls within the scope of protection of the present invention.
- Figure 7 is a schematic flow diagram of a method of performing optimal phase combination selection in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention.
- the method of Figure 7 can be applied to the VAM architecture shown in Figure 5.
- the column phase timer is reset to zero.
- the single-flow CQI reported by the MIMO user is summed and counted, respectively, as C ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4m0 i] and CqiCo satir terCol[i].
- ProcPrdTimerCol ProcPrdl
- the (i+1)th column phase training phase expires, and step 706 is continued. Otherwise, the training phase has not expired and jumps to step 704.
- ProcPrdl is the duration of the column phase training phase.
- StaCqilockCol[i] is the above lock performance value
- ⁇ Zo O ⁇ i] is the above lock loss performance value
- c unlockcol > c lockcol It is used to quickly track the change of the optimal column phase to trigger the migration from the locked state to the unlocked state, and collect the training samples faster; , used to precisely select the optimal phase of the lock, and join ⁇ . ⁇ to trigger the migration of the lock-up state to the lock state.
- the transition process from the lock state to the lock-up state and the transition state of the lock-up state to the lock state are as described above. To avoid repetition, details are not described herein again.
- the maximum value is determined from the N ⁇ values obtained as described above, and the column phase corresponding to the index value of the maximum value is taken as the column phase corresponding to the optimal performance, which is called the optimal column phase. 4, the maximum value is StaCqilockCol[n], and the value of n is 0 ⁇ (N-1), then n is an index value, and the corresponding (n+1)th column phase is the optimal column phase ⁇ ⁇ .
- LockflagCol 0, it is determined according to the set optimal column phase locking rule whether to lock the optimal column phase corresponding to the optimal performance. For example, determine whether the optimal performance SC ⁇ ockCol ⁇ n] is not lower than Mean(StaCqilockCol[i]) + ThreshA, where Meim toC ⁇ todO ⁇ ]) is the average of the N StaCqilockCol[i] obtained in the foregoing, ThreshA Is the preset threshold.
- StaCqiunlockCol[n] is not lower than Mean(StaCqiunlockCol[i]) + ThreshB , wherein Mean StaCqiunlockCol[i]) is the average value of N StaCqiunlockCol[i] obtained in the foregoing, and ThreshB is a preset threshold value.
- LockflagCol 1
- the line phase timer is reset to zero.
- the single-flow CQIs on the MIMO user are summed and counted, respectively, as CqiSumRoM j] and CqiCounterRoM ⁇ ].
- ProcPrdTimerRow ProcPrd2
- the (j+1)th line phase training phase expires, and step 713 is continued. Otherwise, the training phase has not expired and jump to step 711.
- ProcPrd2 is the duration of the phase phase training phase.
- the CqiPerRow[j] is protected as 0.
- the performance result obtained by the training is C ⁇ erRowU].
- StaCqilockRow ⁇ j] StaCqilockRow ⁇ j ] x ( - lockrow )+CqiPerRow ⁇ j] xa lock
- « ⁇ is used to quickly track the change of the optimal column phase to trigger the migration from the locked state to the unlocked state, to collect the training samples more quickly; to select the optimal phase of the lock accurately, and to combine ⁇ .
- ⁇ to trigger the migration of the lock-up state to the lock state.
- the transition process from the lock state to the lock-up state and the transition state of the lock-up state to the lock state are as described above. To avoid repetition, details are not described herein.
- the maximum value is determined from the values of the M StoC ⁇ Zi ⁇ Riwlj] obtained, and the row phase corresponding to the index value of the maximum value is taken as the row phase corresponding to the optimal performance, which is called the optimal row phase. Assuming that the maximum value is StaCqilockRow[m] and the value of m is 0 ⁇ ( M-1 ), m is the index value, and the corresponding ( m+1 ) line phase is the optimal line phase.
- WorkPrdTimer WorkPrd
- WorkPrd is the length of the work phase. It should be understood that since the optimal phase combination and the initial phase combination of the initial settings may be different, any phase combination continuity processing performed when shifting from the fixed phase combination of the working phase to the training phase for performance considerations also falls within the present invention. It is within the scope of protection of the embodiment.
- the process of row phase traversal and column phase traversal does not have to be strictly followed by sequential order, and may be performed partially or completely synchronously.
- the column training phase and the row training phase are not continuous, but are interleaved. That is, after the completion of 709, the column phase is first entered into the working phase of the column phase, and the row training of 710 is started in the middle of the column phase working phase. Accordingly, the 701 train can also begin in the middle of the work phase of the line phase. Columns and rows independently determine the optimal phase. Such modifications are also within the scope of embodiments of the invention.
- the embodiment of the present invention does not limit the specific manner of the line phase training, and the optimal line phase can be trained according to the manner of FIG. 7, or the optimal line phase can be trained according to other methods.
- FIG. 8 is a block diagram of a MIMO signal processing apparatus in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention.
- the signal processing device 80 of FIG. 3 includes a first rotation unit 810 and a first matrix unit 820.
- a first rotation unit 810 configured to perform corresponding column phase rotation on the m virtual antenna signals of the n virtual antenna signals, to obtain m first rotation signals, where the virtual antenna signals are
- the MIMO signal is obtained by multiplying the precoding matrix, where n and m are integers, and l ⁇ m ⁇ n.
- the first matrix unit 820 is configured to multiply the nm virtual antenna signals that are not subjected to the column phase rotation and the m first rotation signals by the VAM matrix of the nxn to obtain n output signals, and the n output signals are used to obtain n Physical antenna signal.
- the column phase rotation is performed on all or part of the virtual antenna signals subjected to PCI weighting, and the cascading manner of the PCI weighting and the column phase rotation is equivalent to expanding the PCI.
- the number of codebooks can correct the quantization accuracy problem caused by the restricted codebook and improve the MIMO performance.
- the first rotating unit 810 is specifically configured to multiply m virtual antenna signals by ⁇ , where ⁇ .
- c is the sequence number of the virtual antenna signal, c E [l, m ].
- the signal processing device 80 further includes a first determining unit 830, configured to determine a selection state of e e , and determine a selection phase of e e according to the selection state of e c .
- the selection states of e e include a locked state and an unlocked state.
- the first determining unit is specifically configured to: when determining that the selected state of the e c is the unlocked state, determine that the selection phase of e e is the training phase; or when determining that the selected state is the locked state, determining that the selection phase of the e c is Alternate training and work phases.
- ⁇ may be used. In the selection phase, the column phase rotation is performed.
- the first rotating unit 810 is specifically configured to periodically update the value in the training phase, and perform column phase rotation according to the updated e e .
- the column phase rotation is performed using a fixed e c for at least part of the working phase.
- the signal processing device 80 further includes a first obtaining unit 840 and a second determining unit 850.
- the first acquisition unit 840 is configured to acquire each updated ⁇ in the training phase.
- the MIMO user equipment corresponds to the reported single stream channel quality indication CQI, and obtains the optimal column phase according to the single stream CQI reported by the MIMO user equipment.
- the second determining unit 850 is configured to determine whether to perform the migration of the selected state according to the optimal column phase when the training phase expires.
- the first obtaining unit 840 is specifically configured to obtain a first sum value obtained by summing the single stream CQI acquired under the current 0 C , and count the single stream CQI obtained under the current ⁇ ⁇ . a first count value; obtaining a current lock performance value and a lock-loss performance value according to the first sum value and the first count value; traversing all ⁇ . After that, all ⁇ will be. The ⁇ with the highest performance value is locked. Determined to be the optimal column phase.
- the first obtaining unit 840 is specifically configured to divide the first sum value by the first count value to obtain a first average value; pre-processing the first average value to obtain a lock performance value and loss of lock Performance value. Alternatively, when the first count value is 0, the first average value may be set to zero.
- the current selection state is an unlocked state:
- the second determining unit 850 is specifically configured to: when the locking performance value of the optimal column phase is not lower than the sum of the average value of all the locking performance values and the first threshold, and the unlocking performance value of the optimal column phase is not lower than all the losses.
- the average of the lock performance value is equal to the second threshold, determining that the selected state transitions from the unlocked state to the locked state; when the locking performance value of the optimal column phase is lower than the average of all the locking performance values and the first threshold
- the loss-lock performance value of the optimal column phase is lower than the sum of the average value of all the lock-loss performance values and the second threshold, it is determined that the selected state does not migrate.
- the second determining unit 850 is specifically configured to determine that the selected state transitions from the locked state to the unlocked state when the unlocking performance value of the optimal column phase is lower than the sum of the average value of all the lost lock performance values and the third threshold; When the optimal column phase loss-locking performance value is not lower than the sum of the average value of all the lock-loss performance values and the third threshold, it is determined that the selected state does not migrate, and the fixed phase used in the next working phase is determined according to the optimal column phase. ⁇ Value.
- the second determining unit 850 is specifically configured to: when the difference between the optimal column phase and the fixed e c used in the previous working phase is greater than the fourth threshold, the optimal column phase e c as a fixed next phase used; otherwise the sessions using a fixed e c e c a constant used in the next phase.
- the signal processing device 80 further includes a second rotating unit 860, configured to perform k-th rotation of the k output signals of the n output signals to obtain k second rotation signals.
- k is a positive integer; wherein nk output signals and k second rotation signals for which no phase rotation is performed are performed as n physical antenna signals.
- the second rotating unit 860 is specifically configured to multiply the k output signals by ⁇ , where ⁇ is a line phase corresponding to the k output signals, and r is a sequence number of the virtual antenna signal, r E [ l , k].
- the signal processing device 80 further includes a third determining unit 870, configured to determine a combined selection state, and determine a selection phase of the ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ combination according to the selected state of the ⁇ combination.
- the combined selection states include a locked state and an unlocked state.
- Third determining unit 870 particularly when it is determined ⁇ 0 e, ⁇ ⁇ state combinations selected for loss of lock state is determined ⁇ 0 e, ⁇ ⁇ composition
- the selection phase is the training phase; when it is determined that the combined selection state is the locked state, ⁇ 0 C is determined, and the combined selection phase is the alternating training phase and the working phase.
- the first rotation unit 810 performs column phase rotation according to the combined selection phase
- the second rotation unit performs line phase rotation according to the selection phase of the ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ combination.
- the first rotating unit 810 is specifically configured to periodically update ⁇ in the training phase. , the combined value, and the column phase rotation according to the updated ⁇ combination; or the column phase rotation using a fixed ⁇ combination for at least part of the working phase.
- the second rotation unit 860 is specifically configured to periodically update the combined values in the training phase, and perform phase rotation according to the updated combination; or use a fixed ⁇ e c in at least part of the working phase , ej combines to perform phase rotation.
- the signal processing apparatus 80 further includes a second obtaining unit 880, configured to acquire, in the training phase, a single stream channel quality indicator corresponding to the MIMO user equipment corresponding to each updated ⁇ combination.
- the CQI and obtains the optimal ⁇ 0 r ⁇ combination according to the single-flow CQI reported by the MIMO user equipment.
- the third determining unit 870 is configured to use the optimal ⁇ when the training phase expires. , the combination determines whether to perform the migration of the selected state.
- the second obtaining unit 880 is specifically configured to obtain a second sum value obtained by summing the single stream CQIs obtained under the current ⁇ e c , e r ⁇ combination, and obtain the current ⁇ combination
- the single-flow CQI is counted to obtain a second count value; the current combined lock performance value and the lock-loss performance value are obtained according to the second sum value and the second count value; after traversing all ⁇ , ⁇ J combinations, all ⁇ combinations are combined
- the combination of ⁇ with the largest locking performance value is determined as the optimal ⁇ combination.
- the second obtaining unit 880 is specifically configured to divide the second sum value by the second count value to obtain a second average value.
- the second obtaining unit 880 can also preprocess the second average to obtain a lock performance value and a lock loss performance value.
- the second average value can be set to zero.
- the current selection state is an unlocked state:
- the third determining unit 880 is specifically used when the optimal ⁇ , the combined locking performance value is not lower than all
- the sum of the average value of the combined locking performance value and the first threshold value and the loss of the optimal column phase performance value is not lower than all ⁇ , the sum of the average value of the combined loss-of-lock performance value and the second threshold , determining that the selected state transitions from the unlocked state to the locked state; when the optimal ⁇ , the combined locking performance value is lower than the sum of the average of the locking performance values of all the ⁇ combinations and the first threshold or the optimal combination of the lockout performance The value is lower than the sum of the average of the lockout performance values of all ⁇ , e r ⁇ combinations and the second threshold When it is determined, the selection state is not migrated;
- the third determining unit 880 is specifically used when the optimal ⁇ , combined loss of lock performance value is lower than all
- the selection state is determined to migrate from the locked state to the unlocked state; when the optimal ⁇ , the combined loss-of-lock performance value is not lower than all ⁇ , when the sum of the combined loss-of-lock performance values and the third threshold is determined, it is determined that the selected state does not migrate, and according to the optimal ⁇ e c , the combination determines the fixed ⁇ e c , the combined value used in the next working phase.
- the third determining unit 880 is specifically configured to: when the optimal ⁇ e c , ej combination and the fixed ⁇ e c used in the previous working phase, the difference between the combinations is greater than the fourth threshold. when the optimal ⁇ e c, used in combination as the next phase immobilized ⁇ e c, combinations thereof; otherwise the sessions using a fixed ⁇ e c, used in combination as the next phase of the A fixed combination of ⁇ , e r ⁇ .
- the embodiment of the invention further provides a base station, including any one of the above MIMO signal processing devices.
- FIG. 9 is a block diagram of a MIMO signal processing apparatus according to another embodiment of the present invention.
- the apparatus 90 of Figure 9 can be used to implement the various steps and methods of the above method embodiments.
- the device 90 can be applied to base stations in various communication systems.
- device 90 includes a transmit circuit 920, a receive circuit 930, a MIMO signal processor 940, a processing unit 950, a memory 960, and an antenna 910.
- Processing unit 950 controls the operation of device 90 and can be used to process signals.
- Processing unit 950 may also be referred to as a CPU (Central Processing Unit).
- Memory 960 can include read only memory and random access memory and provides instructions and data to processing unit 950. A portion of memory 960 may also include non-volatile line random access memory (NVRAM).
- Transmitting circuit 920 and receiving circuit 930 can be coupled to antenna 910.
- bus system 970 which in addition to the data bus includes a power supply bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus.
- bus system 970 various buses are labeled as bus system 970 in the figure.
- the MIMO signal processor 940 may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities. In the implementation process, all or part of the steps of the above method may be completed by the integrated logic circuit of the hardware in the MIMO signal processor 940 or the instruction in the form of software. These instructions can be implemented and controlled by processing unit 950.
- the MIMO signal processor 940 may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), or a dedicated Integrated circuit (ASIC), off-the-shelf programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic device, discrete hardware component.
- DSP digital signal processor
- ASIC dedicated Integrated circuit
- FPGA off-the-shelf programmable gate array
- the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be implemented or executed.
- the general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor or any conventional processor or the like.
- the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be directly implemented as a hardware processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
- the software modules can be located in a conventional storage medium such as random access memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and the like.
- the storage medium is located in the memory 960, and the MIMO signal processor 940 reads the information in the memory 960 and combines its hardware to perform all or part of the steps of the above method.
- the transmitting circuit 920 can perform corresponding column phase rotation on the m virtual antenna signals of the n virtual antenna signals to obtain m first rotating signals, where the virtual antenna signal is obtained by multiplying the MIMO signal by the precoding matrix.
- n, m is an integer, and l ⁇ m ⁇ n; multiply the virtual antenna signals and the m first rotation signals that are not subjected to the phase rotation of the column, and multiply the VAM matrix of nxn to obtain n output signals, n
- the output signal is used to derive n physical antenna signals.
- the column phase rotation is performed on all or part of the virtual antenna signals subjected to PCI weighting, and the cascading manner of the PCI weighting and the column phase rotation is equivalent to expanding the PCI.
- the number of codebooks can correct the quantization accuracy problem caused by the restricted codebook and improve the MIMO performance.
- the transmitting circuit 920 may multiply the m virtual antenna signals by e when performing corresponding column phase rotation on the m virtual antenna signals of the n virtual antenna signals, where 0 e For the column phase corresponding to the m virtual antenna signals, c is the sequence number of the virtual antenna signal, c E [l, m].
- the memory 960 can store instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
- the determined selection state is determined according to the selection state of the selection phase.
- the selected state includes a locked state and an unlocked state.
- the selection state is determined according to the ⁇ selection state
- the selection phase of e e is determined to be the training phase
- the selection phase of determining ⁇ ⁇ is an alternate training phase and working phase.
- the column phase rotation is performed.
- the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
- ⁇ is periodically updated in the training phase. Value, and follow the updated ⁇ .
- the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
- the training phase get 0 after each update.
- the unicast channel quality indicator CQI corresponding to the MIMO user equipment is obtained;
- the optimal column phase is obtained according to the single stream CQI reported by the MIMO user equipment; when the training phase expires, whether the selection state transition is performed according to the optimal column phase is determined.
- the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
- the single stream CQI obtained by the current e c is summed to obtain a first sum value, and the single stream CQI obtained under the current e c is counted.
- the first count value; the current lock performance value and the lock-loss performance value are obtained according to the first sum value and the first count value; after traversing all, the ⁇ ⁇ having the largest lock-in performance value is determined as the optimal column phase.
- the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
- the first average value is divided by the first count value to obtain a first average value; and the first average value is preprocessed Lock performance values and lockout performance values.
- the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
- the first average value is preprocessed to obtain the lock performance value and the lockout performance value
- the first average value is subjected to Alpha filtering to obtain the lock performance value and the lock loss performance value.
- the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
- the optimal column phase lock performance value is lower than the sum of the average of all the lock performance values and the first threshold or the optimal column phase lock loss performance value is lower than the average value and the second threshold of all the lockout performance values When the sum is selected, it is determined that the selection state is not migrated.
- the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
- the fixed ⁇ used in the next working phase is determined based on the optimal column phase.
- the optimal column phase is taken as the fixed e c used in the next working phase; otherwise, a session using the fixed e c e c a constant used in the next phase.
- the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
- the column phase is gradually changed from the column phase end update value of the training phase to the optimal column phase during the initial period of the next working phase.
- the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
- the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
- the training phase is entered, and during the initial period of the training phase, the column phase is gradually changed from the fixed 0 C used in the working phase to the column phase initial update value in the training phase.
- the transmitting circuit 920 can input k out of the n output signals.
- the output signal is rotated by the corresponding line phase to obtain k second rotation signals, where k is a positive integer; power processing is performed on nk output signals and k second rotation signals that are not phase-rotated to obtain n physical antennas signal.
- the transmitting circuit 920 may multiply the k output signals by e when performing corresponding column phase rotation on the m virtual antenna signals of the n virtual antenna signals, where The corresponding line phase of k output signals, r is the sequence number of the virtual antenna signal, re [l, k].
- the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
- the selected states of the above combinations include a locked state and an unlocked state.
- the selection phase of the ⁇ combination is determined according to the selection state of the ⁇ e c , e r ⁇ combination, when it is determined that the selection state of the ⁇ combination is the unlocked state, the selection phase of the combination is determined as the training phase; when the selection of the combination is determined When the state is the locked state, ⁇ ⁇ is determined, and the selected selection phase is the alternating training phase and working phase.
- the column phase rotation when the corresponding column phase rotation is performed on the m virtual antenna signals among the n virtual antenna signals, the column phase rotation can be performed according to the selection phase of the ⁇ e e , ej combination. Similarly, when the corresponding line phase rotation is performed on the k output signals of the n output signals, the column phase rotation can be performed according to the selection phase of ⁇ 0 .
- the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
- the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
- each updated ⁇ is obtained.
- the memory 960 also stores the MIMO signal processor.
- processing unit 950 executes instructions of the following process:
- the optimal column phase is obtained according to the single-stream CQI reported by the MIMO user equipment
- the single-stream CQI obtained under the current ⁇ combination is summed to obtain a second sum value
- the current order is obtained under the combination of the current ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇
- the stream CQI is counted to obtain a second count value
- the current combined lock performance value and the lockout performance value are obtained according to the second sum value and the second count value
- the lock performance value of all combinations is maximized It is determined as the optimum combination ⁇ ⁇ composition.
- the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
- the second average value is divided by the second count value to obtain a second average value; Pre-processing is performed to obtain the lock performance value and the lock-loss performance value.
- the second average value may be set to zero.
- the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
- the second average value is preprocessed to obtain the lock performance value and the lockout performance value
- the second average value is subjected to Alpha filtering to obtain the lock performance value and the lockout performance value.
- the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
- the optimal ⁇ the combined locking performance value is not lower than all ⁇
- the sum of the average of the combined locking performance values and the first threshold and the optimal column phase of the lost lock performance value is not lower than all ⁇ , e r ⁇ combinations
- the average value of the loss-of-lock performance value is equal to the second threshold, it is determined that the selected state transitions from the unlocked state to the locked state;
- the optimal ⁇ the combined locking performance value is lower than all ⁇
- the sum of the combined locking performance value and the first threshold or the optimal ⁇ the combined loss-of-lock performance value is lower than all ⁇ , e r ⁇ combinations
- the average value of the lockout performance value is equal to the second threshold, it is determined that the selected state does not migrate.
- the combined loss-of-lock performance value is lower than the sum of all ⁇ , the combined average value of the lost lock performance value and the third threshold, determining that the selected state transitions from the locked state to the unlocked state;
- the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
- the combination is the optimal ⁇ e c , the combination and the fixed ⁇ e c used in the previous working phase.
- the optimal ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ is combined as a fixed combination used in the next working phase; otherwise, the fixed ⁇ combination used in the previous working phase is taken as the next working phase.
- the range of values of the column phase is smaller than the range of values of the row phase.
- the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other ways.
- the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative.
- the division of the unit is only a logical function division.
- there may be another division manner for example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not executed.
- the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, device or unit, and may be electrical, mechanical or otherwise.
- the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separate, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solution of the embodiment.
- each functional unit in various embodiments of the present invention may be integrated into one processing unit
- each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
- the functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as separate products, may be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
- the technical solution of the present invention which is essential to the prior art or part of the technical solution, may be embodied in the form of a software product stored in a storage medium, including
- the instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of the present invention.
- the foregoing storage medium includes: a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk or an optical disk, and the like, which can store program codes. .
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Radio Transmission System (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
The embodiment of the present invention provides a multiple input multiple output signal processing method, apparatus and base station. The method comprises: performing corresponding column phase rotation on m virtual antenna signals in n virtual antenna signals to obtain m first rotational signals, wherein n and m are integers, and m is greater than or equal to 1 but less than or equal to n; multiplying n-m virtual antenna signals not undergoing the column phase rotation and m first rotational signals by an n×n virtual antenna mapping matrix to obtain n output signals, the n output signals being used for obtaining n physical antenna signals. In the embodiment of the present invention, column phase rotation is performed on all of or part of PCI-weighted virtual antenna signals before the virtual antenna signals are multiplied by the VAM matrix, and such a cascading mode of PCI weighting and column phase rotation is equivalent to that the number of PCI codebooks is expanded, thus the problem of quantification precision caused by limited codebooks can be corrected and MIMO performances are enhanced.
Description
多入多出信号处理方法、 装置和基站 技术领域 Multiple input and multiple output signal processing method, device and base station
本发明涉及无线通信技术领域, 具体地, 涉及多入多出 ( Multiple Input Multiple Output, MIMO )信号处理方法、 装置和基站。 背景技术 The present invention relates to the field of wireless communication technologies, and in particular, to a multiple input multiple output (MIMO) signal processing method, apparatus, and base station. Background technique
宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, WCDMA )开 放网络接口 R7协议引入 MIMO技术, 可成倍地提高峰值吞吐率 MIMO技 术是高速下行分组接入( High Speed Downlink Packet Access, HSDPA )的增 强技术, 用于成倍地提高峰值吞吐率。 在 HSDPA向 MIMO技术过渡期间, 往往出现同一载频共用 MIMO与 HSDPA的现象。 运营商希望 MIMO的引 入策略是 MIMO和传统 HSDPA统一考虑, 同时保持天线间功率平衡。 Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) Open Network Interface R7 Protocol Introduces MIMO Technology, which Can Multiply Improve Peak Throughput MIMO Technology is Enhanced by High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) Technology, used to double the peak throughput. During the transition from HSDPA to MIMO technology, the phenomenon that MIMO and HSDPA are shared by the same carrier frequency often occurs. Operators hope that the MIMO introduction strategy is a unified consideration of MIMO and traditional HSDPA while maintaining power balance between antennas.
当出现 MIMO与 HSDPA共载频时, 为了避免发分集模式下 HSDPA的 性能下降, 选用主辅导频模式, 传统 HSDPA采用单发, 但由此会引起两个 功放的功率不平衡, 因此通过乘上虚拟天线映射 ( Virtual Antenna Mapping, VAM )矩阵, 来达到两个功放 ( Power Amplifier, PA ) 的功率平衡。 VAM 矩阵的形式有多种, 通常是正交矩阵, 当矩阵中的元素是复数时也可以称为 酉矩阵。 这种基站自主决定 VAM形式、 无需通知终端的架构称为 VAM透 明架构。 When the carrier frequency of MIMO and HSDPA occurs, in order to avoid the performance degradation of HSDPA in the transmit diversity mode, the main support frequency mode is adopted, and the traditional HSDPA adopts a single transmission, but this causes power imbalance of the two power amplifiers, so by multiplying Virtual Antenna Mapping (VAM) matrix to achieve power balance of two Power Amplifiers (PAs). There are many forms of VAM matrices, usually orthogonal matrices. When the elements in the matrix are complex, they can also be called 酉 matrices. The architecture in which the base station decides the VAM form and does not need to notify the terminal is called a VAM transparent architecture.
但是, 在该架构下, 为了保持功放平衡, MIMO 单流( Single-Stream MIMO, SS-MIMO ) 的预编码指示 (Pre-Coding Indication, PCI ) 的码本从 原先的 4个限制为 2个。 这种受限的码本量化偏差较大, 波束成型的效果不 佳, 恶化了 MIMO的性能。 发明内容 However, in this architecture, in order to maintain the power amplifier balance, the codebook of Pre-Coding Indication (PCI) of MIMO Single-Stream MIMO (SS-MIMO) is limited from the original four to two. This limited codebook has a large quantization bias, and the beamforming effect is not good, which deteriorates the performance of MIMO. Summary of the invention
本发明实施例提供一种 MIMO信号处理方法、 装置和基站, 能够提高 MIMO性能。 Embodiments of the present invention provide a MIMO signal processing method, apparatus, and base station, which can improve MIMO performance.
第一方面, 提供了一种多入多出 MIMO信号处理方法, 包括: 对 n个 虚拟天线信号中的 m个虚拟天线信号进行相应的列相位旋转, 得到 m个第 一旋转信号, 其中所述虚拟天线信号是将 MIMO信号乘以预编码矩阵得到
的, n、 m为整数, 且 l≤m≤n; 将未进行列相位旋转的 n-m个虚拟天线信号 以及 m个第一旋转信号, 与 nxn的虚拟天线映射矩阵相乘, 得到 n个输出 信号, n个输出信号用于得到 n个物理天线信号。 In a first aspect, a MIMO signal processing method is provided, including: performing a corresponding column phase rotation on m virtual antenna signals in the n virtual antenna signals to obtain m first rotation signals, where The virtual antenna signal is obtained by multiplying the MIMO signal by a precoding matrix. , n, m is an integer, and l ≤ m ≤ n; multiply the virtual antenna signals and the m first rotation signals that are not subjected to the phase rotation of the column, and multiply the virtual antenna mapping matrix of nxn to obtain n output signals. , n output signals are used to obtain n physical antenna signals.
结合第一方面, 在第一方面的第一种实施方式中, 对 n个虚拟天线信号 中的 m个虚拟天线信号进行相应的列相位旋转, 包括: 将 m个虚拟天线信 号与 ^相乘, 其中, ec为与 m个虚拟天线信号相应的列相位, c为虚拟天 线信号的序号, c E [l,m]。 With reference to the first aspect, in a first implementation manner of the first aspect, the performing the corresponding column phase rotation on the m virtual antenna signals in the n virtual antenna signals comprises: multiplying the m virtual antenna signals by ^, Where e c is the column phase corresponding to the m virtual antenna signals, and c is the sequence number of the virtual antenna signal, c E [l, m ].
结合第一方面及其上述实施方式, 在第一方面的第二种实施方式中, 在 对 n个虚拟天线信号中的 m个虚拟天线信号进行相应的列相位旋转之前,该 方法还包括: 确定 ee的选择状态, ee的选择状态包括锁定态和失锁态; 当确 定 ec的选择状态为失锁态时,确定 ec的选择阶段为训练阶段;或者当确定 ec 的选择状态为锁定态时, 确定 θε的选择阶段为交替的训练阶段和工作阶段; 其中, 对 η个虚拟天线信号中的 m个虚拟天线信号进行相应的列相位旋转, 包括: 根据 θ。的选择阶段, 进行列相位旋转。 With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the second implementation manner of the first aspect, before performing the corresponding column phase rotation on the m virtual antenna signals in the n virtual antenna signals, the method further includes: determining The selection state of e e , the selected state of e e includes a locked state and an unlocked state; when it is determined that the selected state of e c is an unlocked state, the selection phase of determining e c is a training phase; or when determining the selection state of e c When the state is locked, the selection phase of determining θ ε is an alternate training phase and a working phase; wherein, the corresponding column phase rotations of the m virtual antenna signals in the n virtual antenna signals include: according to θ. In the selection phase, the column phase rotation is performed.
结合第一方面及其上述实施方式, 在第一方面的第三种实施方式中, 根 据 ec的选择阶段, 进行列相位旋转, 包括: 在训练阶段中, 周期性地更新 ec 的取值, 并按照更新后的 ec进行列相位旋转; 在工作阶段中的至少部分时间 内, 使用固定的 ec进行列相位旋转。 With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the third implementation manner of the first aspect, performing the column phase rotation according to the selection phase of the e c includes: periodically updating the value of the e c in the training phase And perform column phase rotation according to the updated e c ; use a fixed e c for column phase rotation during at least part of the working phase.
结合第一方面及其上述实施方式, 在第一方面的第四种实施方式中, 该 方法还包括: 在训练阶段中, 获取每个更新后的 θ。下 MIMO用户设备对应 上报的单流信道质量指示 CQI; 根据 ΜΙΜΟ用户设备对应上报的单流 CQI 获取最优列相位; 当训练阶段期满时, 根据最优列相位确定是否进行选择状 态的迁移。 In conjunction with the first aspect and the above embodiments, in a fourth implementation of the first aspect, the method further comprises: obtaining, in the training phase, each updated θ. The MIMO user equipment corresponds to the reported single stream channel quality indicator CQI; the optimal column phase is obtained according to the single stream CQI reported by the user equipment; when the training phase expires, whether the selection state transition is performed according to the optimal column phase.
结合第一方面及其上述实施方式, 在第一方面的第五种实施方式中, 根 据 ΜΙΜΟ用户设备对应上报的单流 CQI获取最优列相位, 包括: 对当前 0C 下获取的单流 CQI进行求和得到第一总和值, 对当前 θε下获取的单流 CQI 进行计数得到第一计数值;根据第一总和值和第一计数值得到当前 的锁定 性能值和失锁性能值;在遍历所有 之后,将所有 中锁定性能值最大的 ec 确定为最优列相位。 With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the fifth implementation manner of the first aspect, the optimal column phase is obtained according to the single-flow CQI reported by the user equipment, including: the single-flow CQI acquired under the current 0 C Performing a summation to obtain a first sum value, counting a single stream CQI obtained under current θ ε to obtain a first count value; obtaining a current lock performance value and a lock loss performance value according to the first sum value and the first count value; After traversing all, the e c with the largest lock performance value is determined as the optimal column phase.
结合第一方面及其上述实施方式, 在第一方面的第六种实施方式中, 根 据第一总和值和第一计数值得到当前 的锁定性能值和失锁性能值, 包括:
将第一总和值除以第一计数值得到第一平均值; 对第一平均值进行预处理得 到锁定性能值和失锁性能值。 With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a sixth implementation manner of the first aspect, the current lock performance value and the lock loss performance value are obtained according to the first sum value and the first count value, including: The first average value is divided by the first count value to obtain a first average value; the first average value is preprocessed to obtain a lock performance value and a lockout performance value.
结合第一方面及其上述实施方式, 在第一方面的第七种实施方式中, 对 第一平均值进行预处理得到锁定性能值和失锁性能值, 包括: 对第一平均值 进行 Alpha滤波得到锁定性能值和失锁性能值。 With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a seventh implementation manner of the first aspect, the first average value is preprocessed to obtain a lock performance value and a lock loss performance value, including: performing Alpha filtering on the first average value Get the lock performance value and the lockout performance value.
结合第一方面及其上述实施方式, 在第一方面的第八种实施方式中, 当 训练阶段期满时, 根据最优列相位确定是否进行选择状态的迁移, 包括: 如 果当前的选择状态为失锁态: 当最优列相位的锁定性能值不低于所有 的锁 定性能值的平均值与第一阈值之和并且最优列相位的失锁性能值不低于所 有 ec的失锁性能值的平均值与第二阈值之和时,确定选择状态从失锁态迁移 至锁定态;当最优列相位的锁定性能值低于所有 的锁定性能值的平均值与 第一阈值之和或者最优列相位的失锁性能值低于所有 的失锁性能值的平 均值与第二阈值之和时, 确定选择状态不迁移; 或者, 如果当前的选择状态 为锁定态: 当最优列相位的失锁性能值低于所有 的失锁性能值的平均值与 第三阈值之和时, 确定选择状态从锁定态迁移至失锁态; 当最优列相位的失 锁性能值不低于所有 的失锁性能值的平均值与第三阈值之和时,确定选择 状态不迁移, 根据最优列相位确定下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec的取值。 With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the eighth implementation manner of the first aspect, when the training phase expires, determining whether to perform the migration of the selection state according to the optimal column phase includes: if the current selection state is Loss-locked state: When the optimal column phase lock performance value is not lower than the sum of the average of all the lock performance values and the first threshold and the optimal column phase loss-lock performance value is not lower than all e c lock-loss performance When the average of the value is equal to the second threshold, determining that the selected state transitions from the unlocked state to the locked state; when the locking performance value of the optimal column phase is lower than the sum of the average of all the locking performance values and the first threshold or When the optimal column phase loss-lock performance value is lower than the sum of the average of all the lock-loss performance values and the second threshold, it is determined that the selected state does not migrate; or, if the current selected state is the locked state: when the optimal column phase The loss-locking performance value is lower than the sum of the average value of all the lock-loss performance values and the third threshold, determining that the selected state transitions from the locked state to the unlocked state; when the optimal column phase has a loss-locking performance value not lower than Some loss of lock when the average value of the performance value and the third threshold value, it is determined not to migrate the selected state, the value determined according to the optimal stationary phase column e c is used in the next phase.
结合第一方面及其上述实施方式, 在第一方面的第九种实施方式中, 根 据最优列相位确定下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec的取值, 包括: 当最优列 相位和上一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec之间的差异大于第四阈值时,将最优 列相位作为下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec; 否则将上一工作阶段中使用的 固定的 ec作为下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec。 In conjunction with the first aspect and the above-described embodiments, in a ninth embodiment of the first aspect, the value of the fixed e c used in the next working phase is determined according to the optimal column phase, including: when the optimal column phase When the difference between the fixed e c used in the previous working phase is greater than the fourth threshold, the optimal column phase is used as the fixed e c used in the next working phase; otherwise the fixed used in the previous working phase will be used. a fixed e c e c used in the next session.
结合第一方面及其上述实施方式, 在第一方面的第十种实施方式中, 将 最优列相位作为下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec, 包括: 在下一工作阶段的 初始一段时间内,逐步地将列相位从训练阶段的列相位结束更新值变化至最 优列相位。 In combination with the first aspect and the above-described embodiments, in the tenth embodiment of the first aspect, the optimal column phase is used as the fixed e c used in the next working phase, including: an initial period of time in the next working phase Internally, the column phase is gradually changed from the column phase end update value of the training phase to the optimal column phase.
结合第一方面及其上述实施方式, 在第一方面的第十一种实施方式中, 该方法还包括: 当工作阶段期满时, 进入训练阶段。 With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the eleventh implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes: when the working phase expires, entering the training phase.
结合第一方面及其上述实施方式, 在第一方面的第十二种实施方式中, 当工作阶段期满时, 进入训练阶段, 包括: 在训练阶段的初始一段时间内, 逐步地将列相位从工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec变化至训练阶段的列相位初
始更新值。 With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the twelfth implementation manner of the first aspect, when the working phase expires, entering the training phase includes: gradually stepping the phase in the initial period of the training phase From the fixed e c used in the work phase to the initial phase of the train phase The value is updated.
结合第一方面及其上述实施方式, 在第一方面的第十三种实施方式中, 该方法还包括: 将 n个输出信号中的 k个输出信号进行相应的行相位旋转, 得到 k个第二旋转信号, 其中 k为正整数; 对未进行行相位旋转的 n-k个输 出信号和 k个第二旋转信号进行功放处理以得到 n个物理天线信号。 With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the thirteenth implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes: performing k phase rotation on the k output signals of the n output signals to obtain k first Two rotation signals, where k is a positive integer; power processing is performed on nk output signals and k second rotation signals that are not phase-rotated to obtain n physical antenna signals.
结合第一方面及其上述实施方式, 在第一方面的第十四种实施方式中, 将所述 n个输出信号中的 k个输出信号进行相应的行相位旋转, 包括: 将 k 个输出信号与 ^相乘, 其中, ^为与 k个输出信号相应的行相位, r为虚拟 天线信号的序号, r E [ l ,k]。 In conjunction with the first aspect and the above embodiments, in a fourteenth implementation of the first aspect, the k output signals of the n output signals are subjected to respective row phase rotations, including: k output signals Multiply with ^, where ^ is the line phase corresponding to the k output signals, r is the sequence number of the virtual antenna signal, r E [ l , k].
结合第一方面及其上述实施方式, 在第一方面的第十五种实施方式中, 该方法还包括: 确定 {ee, ej组合的选择状态, {ee, 组合的选择状态包括锁 定态和失锁态; 当确定 {ee, ej组合的选择状态为失锁态时, 确定 {ee, ej组合 的选择阶段为训练阶段; 或者当确定 组合的选择状态为锁定态时, 确 定 {ø }组合的选择阶段为交替的训练阶段和工作阶段, 其中, 根据 {θ ^} 组合的选择阶段, 进行列相位旋转和行相位旋转。 With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the fifteenth implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes: determining a selection state of {e e , ej combination, {e e , the selected state of the combination includes a locked state And the unlocked state; when it is determined that the selection state of the {e e , ej combination is the unlocked state, it is determined that the selection phase of the {e e , ej combination is the training phase; or when it is determined that the selected selection state is the locked state, The selection phase of the combination of ø } is an alternating training phase and a working phase, wherein column phase rotation and row phase rotation are performed according to the selection phase of the {θ ^} combination.
结合第一方面及其上述实施方式, 在第一方面的第十六种实施方式中, 根据 组合的选择阶段, 进行列相位旋转和行相位旋转, 包括: 在训练 阶段中, 周期性地更新 {ø }组合的取值, 并按照更新后的 {ø }组合进行 列相位旋转和行相位旋转;在工作阶段中的至少部分时间内,使用固定的 {ec, ΘΓ}组合进行列相位旋转和行相位旋转。 In conjunction with the first aspect and the above-described embodiments, in the sixteenth embodiment of the first aspect, the column phase rotation and the row phase rotation are performed according to the combined selection phase, including: periodically updating the { in the training phase ø } combination of values, and column phase rotation and row phase rotation according to the updated {ø } combination; column phase rotation using a fixed {e c , Θ Γ } combination for at least part of the working phase And the line phase rotation.
结合第一方面及其上述实施方式, 在第一方面的第十七种实施方式中, 该方法还包括: 在训练阶段中,获取每个更新后的 {θ 组合下 ΜΙΜΟ用户 设备对应上报的单流信道质量指示 CQI; 根据 MIMO用户设备对应上报的 单流 CQI获取最优 {ee, er}组合; 当训练阶段期满时, 根据最优 {ee, er}组合确 定是否进行选择状态的迁移。 With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the seventeenth implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes: acquiring, in the training phase, the updated report corresponding to the user equipment of the {θ combination The channel quality indicator indicates CQI; the optimal {e e , e r } combination is obtained according to the single stream CQI reported by the MIMO user equipment; when the training phase expires, whether to select according to the optimal {e e , e r } combination is determined. Migration of status.
结合第一方面及其上述实施方式, 在第一方面的第十八种实施方式中, 根据 MIMO用户设备对应上报的单流 CQI获取最优列相位,包括:对当前 {0C, er}组合下获取的单流 cQi进行求和得到第二总和值, 对当前 {θ。, 组合下 获取的单流 CQI进行计数得到第二计数值;根据第二总和值和第二计数值得 到当前 组合的锁定性能值和失锁性能值; 在遍历所有 组合之 后, 将所有 {0C, 组合中锁定性能值最大的 {θ 组合确定为最优 组
合。 With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the eighteenth implementation manner of the first aspect, the optimal column phase is obtained according to the single-stream CQI corresponding to the MIMO user equipment, including: the current {0 C , e r } The single stream cQi obtained under the combination is summed to obtain a second sum value for the current {θ. The single stream CQI obtained by the combination is counted to obtain a second count value; the current combined lock performance value and the lock loss performance value are obtained according to the second sum value and the second count value; after traversing all the combinations, all {0 C are obtained , the {θ combination with the largest locking performance value in the combination is determined as the optimal group Hehe.
结合第一方面及其上述实施方式, 在第一方面的第十九种实施方式中, 根据第二总和值和第二计数值得到当前 { , 组合的锁定性能值和失锁性 能值, 包括: 将第二总和值除以第二计数值得到第二平均值; 对第二平均值 进行预处理得到锁定性能值和失锁性能值。 With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the nineteenth implementation manner of the first aspect, the current { , combined locking performance value and the loss-of-lock performance value are obtained according to the second sum value and the second count value, including: The second average value is divided by the second count value to obtain a second average value; the second average value is preprocessed to obtain a lock performance value and a lockout performance value.
结合第一方面及其上述实施方式, 在第一方面的第二十种实施方式中, 对第二平均值进行预处理得到锁定性能值和失锁性能值, 包括: 对第二平均 值进行 Alpha滤波得到锁定性能值和失锁性能值。 In combination with the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a twentieth implementation manner of the first aspect, the second average value is preprocessed to obtain a locking performance value and a lockout performance value, including: performing Alpha on the second average value Filtering yields lock performance values and loss of lock performance values.
结合第一方面及其上述实施方式, 在第一方面的第二十一种实施方式 中,当训练阶段期满时,根据最优 {ec, 组合确定是否进行选择状态的迁移, 包括: 如果当前的选择状态为失锁态: With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the twenty-first embodiment of the first aspect, when the training phase expires, according to the optimal {e c , the combination determines whether to perform the migration of the selected state, including: The current selection state is the unlocked state:
当最优 { , 组合的锁定性能值不低于所有 { , 组合的锁定性能值 的平均值与第一阈值之和并且最优列相位的失锁性能值不低于所有 { , er} 组合的失锁性能值的平均值与第二阈值之和时,确定选择状态从失锁态迁移 至锁定态; 当最优 { , 组合的锁定性能值低于所有 { , 组合的锁定性能 值的平均值与第一阈值之和或者最优 { , 组合的失锁性能值低于所有 { , er}组合的失锁性能值的平均值与第二阈值之和时, 确定选择状态不迁移; 或者, 如果当前的选择状态为锁定态: When the optimal { , the combined locking performance value is not lower than all { , the sum of the average of the combined locking performance values and the first threshold and the optimal column phase of the lost lock performance value is not lower than all { , e r } combinations When the average value of the loss-of-lock performance value is equal to the second threshold, it is determined that the selected state transitions from the unlocked state to the locked state; when the optimal { , the combined locking performance value is lower than all { , the average of the combined locking performance values The sum of the value and the first threshold or the optimal {, the combined loss-of-lock performance value is lower than the sum of the average value of the lock-loss performance values of all { , e r } combinations and the second threshold, determining that the selected state does not migrate; , if the current selection state is locked:
当最优 { , 组合的失锁性能值低于所有 { , 组合的失锁性能值的 平均值与第三阈值之和时,确定选择状态从锁定态迁移至失锁态; 当最优 {ec, 组合的失锁性能值不低于所有 { , 组合的失锁性能值的平均值与第三 阈值之和时, 确定选择状态不迁移, 根据最优 {ee, er}组合确定下一工作阶段 中使用的固定的 {θ 组合的取值。 When the optimal { , combined loss-of-lock performance value is lower than all { , the sum of the average value of the combined loss-of-lock performance value and the third threshold, it is determined that the selected state migrates from the locked state to the unlocked state; c , the combined loss-of-lock performance value is not lower than all { , the sum of the average value of the combined loss-of-lock performance value and the third threshold, determining that the selected state does not migrate, and determining according to the optimal {e e , e r } combination The value of the fixed {θ combination used in a working phase.
结合第一方面及其上述实施方式, 在第一方面的第二十二种实施方式 中, 根据最优 {ec, 组合确定下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 {ec, 组合的取 值, 包括: 当最优 {ec, ej组合和上一工作阶段中使用的固定的 {ec, ej组合之 间的差异大于第四阈值时, 将最优 {θ Θγ}组合作为下一工作阶段中使用的固 定的 {ec, 组合; 否则将上一工作阶段中使用的固定的 {ec, 组合作为下一 工作阶段中使用的固定的 {ec, er}组合。 In combination with the first aspect and the above-described embodiments, in the twenty-second embodiment of the first aspect, the fixed {e c , the combined value used in the next working phase is determined according to the optimal {e c , the combination , including: When the optimal {e c , ej combination and the fixed {e c , ej combination used in the previous working phase are greater than the fourth threshold, the optimal {θ Θ γ } is combined as the next The fixed {e c , combination used in the work phase; otherwise the fixed {e c used in the previous work phase is combined as the fixed {e c , e r } combination used in the next work phase.
结合第一方面及其上述实施方式, 在第一方面的第二十三种实施方式 中, 列相位的取值范围小于行相位的取值范围且列相位的量化精度大于行相
位的量化精度。 With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the twenty-third implementation manner of the first aspect, the value range of the column phase is smaller than the value range of the row phase and the quantization precision of the column phase is greater than the row phase The quantization precision of the bit.
第二方面, 提供了一种多入多出 MIMO信号处理装置, 包括: 第一旋 转单元,用于对 n个虚拟天线信号中的 m个虚拟天线信号进行相应的列相位 旋转, 得到 m个第一旋转信号, 其中所述虚拟天线信号是将 MIMO信号乘 以预编码矩阵得到的, n、 m为整数, 且 l≤m≤n; 第一矩阵单元, 用于将未 进行列相位旋转的 n-m个虚拟天线信号以及 m个第一旋转信号, 与 nxn的 虚拟天线映射矩阵相乘, 得到 n个输出信号, n个输出信号用于得到 n个物 理天线信号。 In a second aspect, a MIMO signal processing apparatus is provided, including: a first rotating unit, configured to perform corresponding column phase rotation on m virtual antenna signals in the n virtual antenna signals, to obtain m first a rotation signal, wherein the virtual antenna signal is obtained by multiplying a MIMO signal by a precoding matrix, n, m is an integer, and l ≤ m ≤ n; a first matrix unit for nm that does not perform column phase rotation The virtual antenna signals and the m first rotation signals are multiplied by the virtual antenna mapping matrix of nxn to obtain n output signals, and the n output signals are used to obtain n physical antenna signals.
结合第二方面, 在第二方面的第一种实施方式中, 第一旋转单元具体用 于将 m个虚拟天线信号与 ^相乘, 其中, ec为与 m个虚拟天线信号相应 的列相位, c为虚拟天线信号的序号, c E [l ,m]。 With reference to the second aspect, in a first implementation manner of the second aspect, the first rotating unit is specifically configured to multiply the m virtual antenna signals by ^, where e c is a column phase corresponding to the m virtual antenna signals , c is the serial number of the virtual antenna signal, c E [l , m ].
结合第二方面及其上述实施方式, 在第二方面的第二种实施方式中, 该 MIMO信号处理装置还包括第一确定单元, 用于确定 θ。的选择状态, θ。的选 择状态包括锁定态和失锁态。第一确定单元还用于当确定 θ。的选择状态为失 锁态时, 确定 ee的选择阶段为训练阶段; 或者当确定 ee的选择状态为锁定 态时, 确定 Θ。的选择阶段为交替的训练阶段和工作阶段。 其中, 第一旋转单 元具体用于根据 ec的选择阶段, 进行列相位旋转。 In conjunction with the second aspect and the above embodiments, in a second implementation of the second aspect, the MIMO signal processing apparatus further includes a first determining unit for determining θ. The state of choice, θ. The selected states include a locked state and an unlocked state. The first determining unit is also used to determine θ. When the selected state is the unlocked state, the selection phase of e e is determined to be the training phase; or when it is determined that the selected state of e e is the locked state, Θ is determined. The selection phase is an alternating training phase and work phase. The first rotating unit is specifically configured to perform column phase rotation according to a selection phase of e c .
结合第二方面及其上述实施方式, 在第二方面的第三种实施方式中, 第 一旋转单元具体用于在训练阶段中, 周期性地更新 ec的取值, 并按照更新后 的 ec进行列相位旋转; 在工作阶段中的至少部分时间内, 使用固定的 ec进 行列相位旋转。 With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the third implementation manner of the second aspect, the first rotating unit is specifically configured to periodically update the value of e c in the training phase, and follow the updated e c performs column phase rotation; at least part of the working phase, the column phase rotation is performed using a fixed e c .
结合第二方面及其上述实施方式, 在第二方面的第四种实施方式中, 该 With reference to the second aspect and the above embodiments, in a fourth implementation manner of the second aspect,
MIMO信号处理装置还包括: 第一获取单元, 用于在训练阶段中, 获取每个 更新后的 θ。下 MIMO用户设备对应上报的单流信道质量指示 CQI; 并根据 MIMO用户设备对应上报的单流 CQI获取最优列相位; 第二确定单元, 用 于当训练阶段期满时, 根据最优列相位确定是否进行选择状态的迁移。 The MIMO signal processing apparatus further includes: a first acquisition unit, configured to acquire each updated θ in the training phase. The MIMO user equipment corresponds to the reported single stream channel quality indication CQI; and the optimal column phase is obtained according to the single stream CQI reported by the MIMO user equipment; and the second determining unit is configured to: according to the optimal column phase when the training phase expires Determine whether to perform a migration of the selected state.
结合第二方面及其上述实施方式, 在第二方面的第五种实施方式中, 第 一获取单元具体用于对当前 θ。下获取的单流 CQI进行求和得到第一总和值, 对当前 下获取的单流 CQI进行计数得到第一计数值; 根据第一总和值和 第一计数值得到当前 的锁定性能值和失锁性能值; 在遍历所有 之后, 将所有 θ。中锁定性能值最大的 θ。确定为最优列相位。
结合第二方面及其上述实施方式, 在第二方面的第六种实施方式中, 第 一获取单元具体用于将第一总和值除以第一计数值得到第一平均值; 对第一 平均值进行预处理得到锁定性能值和失锁性能值。 With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing embodiments, in a fifth implementation manner of the second aspect, the first acquiring unit is specifically configured to use the current θ. The obtained single stream CQI is summed to obtain a first sum value, and the currently obtained single stream CQI is counted to obtain a first count value; the current lock performance value and the lock loss are obtained according to the first sum value and the first count value. Performance value; after traversing all, all θ will be. The θ with the highest performance value is locked. Determined to be the optimal column phase. With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing embodiments, in a sixth implementation manner of the second aspect, the first acquiring unit is configured to: divide the first sum value by the first count value to obtain a first average value; The values are preprocessed to obtain lock performance values and lockout performance values.
结合第二方面及其上述实施方式, 在第二方面的第七种实施方式中, 如 果当前的选择状态为失锁态: 第二确定单元具体用于当最优列相位的锁定性 能值不低于所有 的锁定性能值的平均值与第一阈值之和并且最优列相位 的失锁性能值不低于所有 的失锁性能值的平均值与第二阈值之和时,确定 选择状态从失锁态迁移至锁定态; 当最优列相位的锁定性能值低于所有 ec 的锁定性能值的平均值与第一阈值之和或者最优列相位的失锁性能值低于 所有 ec的失锁性能值的平均值与第二阈值之和时, 确定选择状态不迁移; 或 者, 如果当前的选择状态为锁定态: 第二确定单元具体用于当最优列相位的 失锁性能值低于所有 的失锁性能值的平均值与第三阈值之和时,确定选择 状态从锁定态迁移至失锁态;当最优列相位的失锁性能值不低于所有 的失 锁性能值的平均值与第三阈值之和时, 确定选择状态不迁移, 根据最优列相 位确定下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec的取值。 With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the seventh implementation manner of the second aspect, if the current selection state is an unlocked state: the second determining unit is specifically configured to: when the optimal column phase has a low locking performance value Determining the selection state from the sum of the average of all the locking performance values and the first threshold and the loss of the optimal column phase is not lower than the sum of the average of all the loss-of-lock performance values and the second threshold. The lock state transitions to the locked state; when the lock performance value of the optimal column phase is lower than the sum of the average value of the lock performance values of all e c and the first threshold or the loss of the optimal column phase is lower than all e c When the average value of the loss-of-lock performance value is equal to the second threshold, it is determined that the selected state does not migrate; or, if the current selected state is the locked state: the second determining unit is specifically configured to use the low-locking performance value of the optimal column phase Determining the selected state transitions from the locked state to the unlocked state when the sum of the average of the loss-of-lock performance values is equal to the third threshold; when the optimal column phase loss-locking performance value is not lower than all the loss-locking performance values Average and When three and the threshold value, the selected state is determined not to migrate, a fixed value of e c next phase column used according to the optimum phase is determined.
结合第二方面及其上述实施方式, 在第二方面的第八种实施方式中, 第 二确定单元具体用于当最优列相位和上一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec之间 的差异大于第四阈值时, 将最优列相位作为下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec; 否则将上一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec作为下一工作阶段中使用的固定 的 0C。 With reference to the second aspect and the above embodiments, in the eighth implementation manner of the second aspect, the second determining unit is specifically configured to use the difference between the optimal column phase and the fixed e c used in the previous working phase. When it is greater than the fourth threshold, the optimal column phase is used as the fixed e c used in the next working phase; otherwise, the fixed e c used in the previous working phase is used as the fixed 0 C used in the next working phase.
结合第二方面及其上述实施方式, 在第二方面的第九种实施方式中, 该 MIMO信号处理装置还包括: 第二旋转单元, 用于将 n个输出信号中的 k个 输出信号进行相应的行相位旋转,得到 k个第二旋转信号,其中 k为正整数; 其中未进行行相位旋转的 n-k个输出信号和 k个第二旋转信号作为 n个物理 天线信号。 With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the ninth implementation manner of the second aspect, the MIMO signal processing apparatus further includes: a second rotation unit, configured to perform k output signals of the n output signals The row phase is rotated to obtain k second rotation signals, where k is a positive integer; wherein nk output signals and k second rotation signals for which phase rotation is not performed are taken as n physical antenna signals.
结合第二方面及其上述实施方式, 在第二方面的第十种实施方式中, 第 二旋转单元具体用于将 k个输出信号与 ^相乘, 其中, 为与 k个输出信 号相应的行相位, r为虚拟天线信号的序号, r E [l ,k]。 With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the tenth implementation manner of the second aspect, the second rotation unit is specifically configured to multiply the k output signals by ^, where is a row corresponding to the k output signals Phase, r is the sequence number of the virtual antenna signal, r E [l , k].
结合第二方面及其上述实施方式, 在第二方面的第十一种实施方式中, 还包括第三确定单元, 用于确定 {ec, er}组合的选择状态, 并根据 {ec, er}组合 的选择状态确定 {θ er}组合的选择阶段, 其中第一旋转单元根据 {θ er}组合
的选择阶段进行列相位旋转, 并且第二旋转单元根据 {0C, 组合的选择阶段 进行行相位旋转。 With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the eleventh implementation manner of the second aspect, the third determining unit is further configured to determine a selection state of the {e c , e r } combination, and according to {e c , the selection state of the combination of e r } determines a selection phase of the combination of {θ e r }, wherein the first rotation unit is combined according to {θ e r } The selection phase performs column phase rotation, and the second rotation unit performs line phase rotation according to the selected phase of {0 C .
结合第二方面及其上述实施方式, 在第二方面的第十二种实施方式中, With reference to the second aspect and the above embodiments thereof, in the twelfth embodiment of the second aspect,
{θ0, er}组合的选择状态包括锁定态和失锁态, 第三确定单元具体用于当确定 {θ0, 组合的选择状态为失锁态时, 确定 {θ 组合的选择阶段为训练阶 段; 当确定 {ee, ej组合的选择状态为锁定态时, 确定 {ee, ej组合的选择阶段 为交替的训练阶段和工作阶段。 The selected state of the combination of {θ 0 , e r } includes a locked state and an unlocked state, and the third determining unit is specifically configured to determine the selection phase of the {θ combination when determining {θ 0 and the selected state of the combination is the unlocked state During the training phase; when it is determined that the selection state of the {e e , ej combination is the locked state, it is determined that the selection phase of the {e e , ej combination is an alternate training phase and a working phase.
结合第二方面及其上述实施方式, 在第二方面的第十三种实施方式中, 第一旋转单元具体用于在训练阶段中, 周期性地更新 组合的取值, 并 按照更新后的 组合进行列相位旋转; 或者在工作阶段中的至少部分时 间内, 使用固定的 {ec, er}组合进行列相位旋转; 第二旋转单元具体用于在训 练阶段中, 周期性地更新 组合的取值, 并按照更新后的 {ø }组合进 行行相位旋转; 或者在工作阶段中的至少部分时间内, 使用固定的 {ec, 组 合进行行相位旋转。 With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the thirteenth implementation manner of the second aspect, the first rotating unit is specifically configured to periodically update the combined value in the training phase, and follow the updated combination. Performing column phase rotation; or performing column phase rotation using a fixed combination of {e c , e r } for at least part of the working phase; the second rotation unit is specifically for periodically updating the combination during the training phase Take values and perform phase rotation according to the updated {ø } combination; or use a fixed {e c , combination for phase rotation at least part of the working phase.
结合第二方面及其上述实施方式, 在第二方面的第十四种实施方式中, 还包括第二获取单元, 用于在训练阶段中, 获取每个更新后的 {θ 组合下 With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the fourteenth implementation manner of the second aspect, the second acquiring unit is further configured to acquire, in the training phase, each updated {θ combination
MIMO用户设备对应上报的单流信道质量指示 CQI, 并根据 MIMO用户设 备对应上报的单流 CQI获取最优 组合; 第三确定单元, 用于当训练阶 段期满时, 根据最优 组合确定是否进行选择状态的迁移。 The MIMO user equipment corresponds to the reported single stream channel quality indication CQI, and obtains an optimal combination according to the single stream CQI reported by the MIMO user equipment. The third determining unit is configured to determine whether to perform according to the optimal combination when the training phase expires. Select the migration of the state.
结合第二方面及其上述实施方式, 在第二方面的第十五种实施方式中, 第二获取单元具体用于对当前 {θ 组合下获取的单流 CQI进行求和得到 第二总和值, 对当前 {θ 组合下获取的单流 CQI进行计数得到第二计数 值; 根据第二总和值和第二计数值得到当前 { , 组合的锁定性能值和失锁 性能值; 在遍历所有 { , Θ j组合之后, 将所有 组合中锁定性能值最大 的 {θ er}组合确定为最优 er}组合。 With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the fifteenth implementation manner of the second aspect, the second obtaining unit is specifically configured to obtain a second sum value by summing the single-flow CQIs obtained under the current {θ combination, Counting the single stream CQI obtained under the current {θ combination to obtain a second count value; obtaining the current { , combined lock performance value and the lock loss performance value according to the second sum value and the second count value; traversing all { , Θ After j is combined, the combination of {θ e r } with the highest locking performance value in all combinations is determined as the optimal e r } combination.
结合第二方面及其上述实施方式, 在第二方面的第十六种实施方式中, 第二获取单元具体用于将第二总和值除以第二计数值得到第二平均值; 对第 二平均值进行预处理得到锁定性能值和失锁性能值。 With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the sixteenth implementation manner of the second aspect, the second obtaining unit is specifically configured to: divide the second sum value by the second count value to obtain a second average value; The average is preprocessed to obtain the lock performance value and the lockout performance value.
结合第二方面及其上述实施方式, 在第二方面的第十七种实施方式中, 如果当前的选择状态为失锁态: With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the seventeenth implementation manner of the second aspect, if the current selection state is an unlocked state:
第三确定单元具体用于当最优 { , er}组合的锁定性能值不低于所有 {ec,
ΘΓ}组合的锁定性能值的平均值与第一阈值之和并且最优列相位的失锁性能 值不低于所有 { , 组合的失锁性能值的平均值与第二阈值之和时, 确定选 择状态从失锁态迁移至锁定态;当最优 { , 组合的锁定性能值低于所有 { , er}组合的锁定性能值的平均值与第一阈值之和或者最优 { , Θ j组合的失锁 性能值低于所有 { , 组合的失锁性能值的平均值与第二阈值之和时, 确定 选择状态不迁移; The third determining unit is specifically configured to: when the optimal { , e r } combination has a locking performance value not lower than all {e c , Θ Γ } the sum of the average value of the combined locking performance value and the first threshold and the loss of the optimal column phase is not lower than the sum of all the values of the combined loss-of-lock performance value and the second threshold. Determining that the selected state transitions from the unlocked state to the locked state; when the optimal { , the combined locking performance value is lower than the sum of the average of the locking performance values of all { , e r } combinations and the first threshold or the optimal { , Θ The lockout performance value of the j combination is lower than the sum of all the {, the average value of the combined lockout performance value and the second threshold, determining that the selected state does not migrate;
或者, 如果当前的选择状态为锁定态: Or, if the current selection state is locked:
第三确定单元具体用于当最优 { , 组合的失锁性能值低于所有 { , er} 组合的失锁性能值的平均值与第三阈值之和时,确定选择状态从锁定态迁移 至失锁态; 当最优 组合的失锁性能值不低于所有 { , 组合的失锁性 能值的平均值与第三阈值之和时, 确定选择状态不迁移, 根据最优 组 合确定下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 {θ 组合的取值。 The third determining unit is specifically configured to determine that the selected state is migrated from the locked state when the optimal unlocking performance value is lower than the sum of the average value of the unlocking performance values of all { , e r } combinations and the third threshold When the lockout performance value of the optimal combination is not lower than the sum of the average of the combined lockout performance value and the third threshold, it is determined that the selected state does not migrate, and the next combination is determined according to the optimal combination. The value of the fixed {θ combination used in the work phase.
结合第二方面及其上述实施方式, 在第二方面的第十八种实施方式中, 第三确定单元具体用于当最优 {ec, 组合和上一工作阶段中使用的固定的 {θ0, 组合之间的差异大于第四阈值时, 将最优 {θε, 组合作为下一工作阶 段中使用的固定的 {θ 组合; 否则将上一工作阶段中使用的固定的 {θ ΘΓ} 组合作为下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 {θ 组合。 In combination with the second aspect and the above-described embodiments, in the eighteenth embodiment of the second aspect, the third determining unit is specifically configured to use the fixed {θ c , the combination and the fixed {θ used in the previous working phase. 0 , when the difference between the combinations is greater than the fourth threshold, the optimal {θ ε is combined as the fixed {θ combination used in the next working phase; otherwise the fixed {θ Θ 使用 used in the previous working phase will be used. } Combine as a fixed {θ combination used in the next session.
第三方面, 提供了一种基站, 包括上述多入多出 MIMO信号处理装置。 本发明实施例在将虚拟天线信号乘以 VAM矩阵之前, 对进行了 PCI加 权的全部或部分虚拟天线信号进行列相位旋转,这种 PCI加权和列相位旋转 的级联方式等价于扩展了 PCI码本个数,从而能够修正受限码本带来的量化 精度问题, 提高 MIMO性能。 附图说明 In a third aspect, a base station is provided, comprising the above multiple input and multiple output MIMO signal processing apparatus. In the embodiment of the present invention, before the virtual antenna signal is multiplied by the VAM matrix, the column phase rotation is performed on all or part of the virtual antenna signals subjected to PCI weighting, and the cascading manner of the PCI weighting and the column phase rotation is equivalent to expanding the PCI. The number of codebooks can correct the quantization accuracy problem caused by the restricted codebook and improve the MIMO performance. DRAWINGS
为了更清楚地说明本发明实施例的技术方案, 下面将对实施例或现有技 术描述中所需要使用的附图作筒单地介绍, 显而易见地, 下面描述中的附图 仅仅是本发明的一些实施例, 对于本领域普通技术人员来讲, 在不付出创造 性劳动的前提下, 还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。 In order to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present invention, the drawings to be used in the embodiments or the description of the prior art will be briefly described below. Obviously, the drawings in the following description are only the present invention. For some embodiments, other drawings may be obtained from those of ordinary skill in the art without departing from the drawings.
图 1是本发明一个实施例的 MIMO信号处理方法的流程图。 1 is a flow chart of a MIMO signal processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
图 2是本发明一个实施例的选择状态的示意时序图。 2 is a schematic timing diagram of a selected state of an embodiment of the present invention.
图 3是本发明一个实施例的增强 VAM方案的例子的示意图。
图 4是本发明一个实施例的进行最优列相位选择的方法的示意流程图。 图 5是本发明另一实施例的增强 VAM方案的例子的示意图。 3 is a schematic diagram of an example of an enhanced VAM scheme in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a schematic flow diagram of a method of performing optimal column phase selection in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of an example of an enhanced VAM scheme according to another embodiment of the present invention.
图 6 是本发明一个实施例的进行最优相位组合选择的方法的示意流程 图。 Figure 6 is a schematic flow diagram of a method of performing optimal phase combination selection in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention.
图 7 是本发明另一实施例的进行最优相位组合选择的方法的示意流程 图。 Figure 7 is a schematic flow diagram of a method of performing optimal phase combination selection in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention.
图 8是本发明一个实施例的 MIMO信号处理装置的框图。 Figure 8 is a block diagram of a MIMO signal processing apparatus in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention.
图 9是本发明另一实施例的 MIMO信号处理装置的框图。 具体实施方式 Figure 9 is a block diagram of a MIMO signal processing apparatus according to another embodiment of the present invention. detailed description
下面将结合本发明实施例中的附图,对本发明实施例中的技术方案进行 清楚、 完整地描述, 显然, 所描述的实施例是本发明一部分实施例, 而不是 全部的实施例。 基于本发明中的实施例, 本领域普通技术人员在没有作出创 造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例, 都属于本发明保护的范围。 The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention are clearly and completely described in the following with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present invention. It is obvious that the described embodiments are a part of the embodiments of the present invention, and not all of the embodiments. All other embodiments obtained by a person of ordinary skill in the art based on the embodiments of the present invention without making creative labor are within the scope of the present invention.
图 1是本发明一个实施例的 MIMO信号处理方法的流程图。 图 1的方 法可以由基站执行。 1 is a flow chart of a MIMO signal processing method according to an embodiment of the present invention. The method of Figure 1 can be performed by a base station.
101 , 对 n个虚拟天线信号中的 m个虚拟天线信号进行相应的列相位旋 转, 得到 m个第一旋转信号, 其中虚拟天线信号是将 MIMO信号乘以预编 码矩阵得到的, n、 m为整数, 且 l≤m≤n。 101. Perform corresponding column phase rotation on the m virtual antenna signals in the n virtual antenna signals to obtain m first rotation signals, where the virtual antenna signal is obtained by multiplying the MIMO signal by a precoding matrix, where n and m are Integer, and l ≤ m ≤ n.
具体地,虚拟天线信号是经过 PCI加权后要输入到 VAM的信号。 MIMO 设备均配置 PCI矩阵模块, 对需要发射的信号进行 PCI加权。 Specifically, the virtual antenna signal is a signal that is input to the VAM after being weighted by PCI. MIMO devices are equipped with a PCI matrix module that performs PCI weighting on the signals that need to be transmitted.
102, 将未进行列相位旋转的 n-m个虚拟天线信号以及 m个第一旋转信 号, 与 nxn的 VAM矩阵相乘, 得到 n个输出信号, n个输出信号用于得到 n 个物理天线信号。 102. Multiply the n-m virtual antenna signals and the m first rotation signals that are not phase-rotated, and multiply the VAM matrix of nxn to obtain n output signals, and the n output signals are used to obtain n physical antenna signals.
换句话说, 对 m个虚拟天线信号进行列相位旋转得到 m个第一旋转信 号并作为 VAM矩阵的 m个输入,其余 n-m个虚拟天线信号不进行列相位旋 转而直接作为 VAM矩阵的另外 n-m个输入。 这样 VAM矩阵总共有 n个输 入信号。将这 n个输入信号乘以 nxn的 VAM矩阵,从而得到 n个输出信号。 In other words, the m virtual antenna signals are rotated by the column phase to obtain m first rotation signals and are used as m inputs of the VAM matrix, and the remaining nm virtual antenna signals are directly rotated as the column phase and directly used as the other nm of the VAM matrix. Input. Thus the VAM matrix has a total of n input signals. The n input signals are multiplied by the VAM matrix of nxn to obtain n output signals.
联接虚拟天线和物理天线的矩阵称为 VAM矩阵。从特性上说, VAM通 常可以是正交矩阵(当矩阵中的元素是复数时也可称为酉矩阵)。 The matrix connecting the virtual antenna and the physical antenna is called a VAM matrix. In terms of characteristics, VAM can usually be an orthogonal matrix (also called a unitary matrix when the elements in the matrix are complex).
本发明实施例在将虚拟天线信号乘以 VAM矩阵之前, 对进行了 PCI加
权的全部或部分虚拟天线信号进行列相位旋转,这种 PCI加权和列相位旋转 的级联方式等价于扩展了 PCI码本个数,从而能够修正受限码本带来的量化 精度问题, 提高 MIMO性能。 In the embodiment of the present invention, before the virtual antenna signal is multiplied by the VAM matrix, the PCI is added. All or part of the virtual antenna signal is rotated in column phase. This cascading manner of PCI weighting and column phase rotation is equivalent to expanding the number of PCI codebooks, thereby being able to correct the quantization accuracy problem caused by the limited codebook. Improve MIMO performance.
需要说明的是, 在 VAM矩阵之前进行相位旋转, 相当于旋转 MIMO信 号的列相位, 因此可称为列相位旋转。 另外, 在 VAM矩阵之后进行相位旋 转, 相当于旋转 MIMO信号的行相位, 因此可称为行相位旋转。 It should be noted that phase rotation before the VAM matrix corresponds to the column phase of the rotated MIMO signal, so it can be called column phase rotation. In addition, phase rotation after the VAM matrix corresponds to the line phase of the rotated MIMO signal, so it can be called line phase rotation.
可选地,作为一个实施例,在步骤 101中对 n个虚拟天线信号中的 m个 虚拟天线信号进行相应的列相位旋转时, 可将 m个虚拟天线信号与 ^相 乘, 其中, 0e为与 m个虚拟天线信号相应的列相位, c为虚拟天线信号的序 号, c≡[l,m] 0 ec也可以称为列调相因子。 Optionally, as an embodiment, when the corresponding column phase rotation is performed on the m virtual antenna signals in the n virtual antenna signals in step 101, the m virtual antenna signals may be multiplied by ^, where 0 e For the column phase corresponding to the m virtual antenna signals, c is the sequence number of the virtual antenna signal, and c≡[l,m] 0 e c may also be referred to as a column phase modulation factor.
具体地, 在本发明实施例中, 对于进行列相位旋转的那部分虚拟天线信 号, 列调相因子和 MIMO本身固有的 PCI加权因子直接级联(相乘), 这种 级联方式从整体来看等价于扩展了 PCI码本个数,从而可以修正受限码本带 来的量化精度问题。 另一方面, 这种码本扩展使得天线输出的物理天线信号 会产生不同的幅度差, 即引入一些功放不平衡。 但这种不平衡程度相比原先 4码本的 PCI方案所带来的不平衡程度要小, 这样能够用轻微的功放不平衡 换来 MIMO性能的提升。 Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, for the part of the virtual antenna signal that performs the column phase rotation, the column phase modulation factor and the PCI weighting factor inherent in the MIMO itself are directly cascaded (multiplied), and the cascading mode is It is equivalent to expanding the number of PCI codebooks, so that the quantization accuracy problem caused by the restricted codebook can be corrected. On the other hand, this codebook extension causes the physical antenna signals output by the antenna to produce different amplitude differences, that is, introduce some power amplifier imbalance. However, this imbalance is less unbalanced than the original 4-codebook PCI solution, which can result in a slight power amplifier imbalance for MIMO performance improvement.
可选地,作为另一实施例,在步骤 101之前,还可以确定 θ。的选择状态, 其中 的选择状态包括锁定态和失锁态。然后,可根据 ec的选择状态确定 ec 的选择阶段。 具体地, 当确定 ee的选择状态为失锁态时, 确定 Θ^々选择阶 段为训练阶段; 或者, 当确定 ee的选择状态为锁定态时, 确定 Θ^々选择阶 段为交替的训练阶段和工作阶段。 在此情况下, 在步骤 101中对 η个虚拟天 线信号中的 m个虚拟天线信号进行相应的列相位旋转时, 可根据 ec的选择 阶段, 进行列相位旋转。 Alternatively, as another embodiment, θ may also be determined prior to step 101. The selected state, wherein the selected state includes a locked state and an unlocked state. Then, the selection phase can be determined according to the selection status of e c e c a. Specifically, when it is determined that the selected state of e e is an unlocked state, it is determined that the selection phase is a training phase; or, when it is determined that the selected state of e e is a locked state, determining that the selection phase is an alternate training Stage and work stage. In this case, when the corresponding column phase rotation is performed on the m virtual antenna signals of the n virtual antenna signals in step 101, the column phase rotation can be performed according to the selection phase of e c .
可选地,作为另一实施例, 为了进一步减少列调相因子 ec引入的功放不 平衡的程度, ec的取值范围可以较窄, 但在该取值范围内量化精度较高 (即 取值步长较短)。 例如, 0e可以限制在 ±30。的窗内, 但以 15。为取值步长, 即 9c e [-30°, -15°, 0, 15°, 30°]。但本发明实施例对的具体取值范围和取值步长不 作限制。 Optionally, as another embodiment, in order to further reduce the degree of power amplifier imbalance introduced by the column phase modulation factor e c , the value range of e c may be narrow, but the quantization precision is high within the value range (ie, The value step is shorter). For example, 0 e can be limited to ±30. Inside the window, but to 15. In order to take the value, ie 9 c e [-30°, -15°, 0, 15°, 30°]. However, the specific value range and the value step of the embodiment of the present invention are not limited.
图 2是本发明一个实施例的选择状态的示意时序图。 图 2的实施例可以 通过状态机来实现, 该状态机在锁定态和失锁态之间迁移。
如图 2所示, 在失锁态下, 表明最优 ec的变化剧烈, 不能锁定, 因此可 以周期性地重复训练阶段, 以达到稳定的最优 ec。 2 is a schematic timing diagram of a selected state of an embodiment of the present invention. The embodiment of Figure 2 can be implemented by a state machine that migrates between a locked state and an unlocked state. As shown in Fig. 2, in the unlocked state, it indicates that the optimal e c changes drastically and cannot be locked, so the training phase can be repeated periodically to achieve a stable optimal e c .
在锁定态下, 最优 ec比较稳定。 ec的选择阶段为交替的训练阶段和工作 阶段。 应注意, 图 2中训练阶段和工作阶段的交替方式只是示例性的, 而非 对本发明实施例的限制。 例如, 在从失锁态迁移至锁定态后, 可以先进入工 作阶段, 也可以先进入训练阶段; 或者, 在从锁定态迁移至失锁态前, 锁定 态的最后一个选择阶段可以是工作阶段, 也可以是训练阶段。 In the locked state, the optimal e c is relatively stable. The selection phase of e c is an alternating training phase and working phase. It should be noted that the alternate manner of the training phase and the working phase in FIG. 2 is merely exemplary and not a limitation of the embodiments of the present invention. For example, after moving from the unlocked state to the locked state, it may enter the working phase first, or may enter the training phase first; or, before moving from the locked state to the unlocked state, the last selected phase of the locked state may be the working phase. It can also be a training phase.
另外, 工作阶段和训练阶段的持续时间可以是固定的。 一般而言, 工作 阶段的持续时间比训练阶段的持续时间更长, 但本发明实施例对此不作限 制。 In addition, the duration of the work phase and the training phase can be fixed. In general, the duration of the working phase is longer than the duration of the training phase, but this embodiment of the invention does not limit this.
可选地, 作为一个实施例, 在根据 θ。的选择阶段, 进行列相位旋转时, 在训练阶段中, 周期性地更新 θε的取值, 并按照更新后的 θε进行列相位旋 转。 在工作阶段中的至少部分时间内, 使用固定的 ec进行列相位旋转。 该固 定的 ec可以称为最优 ec。 Optionally, as an embodiment, according to θ. In the selection phase, when the column phase rotation is performed, in the training phase, the value of θ ε is periodically updated, and the column phase rotation is performed in accordance with the updated θ ε . The column phase rotation is performed using a fixed e c for at least part of the working phase. This fixed e c can be referred to as the optimal e c .
换句话说, 在训练阶段中, 依次遍历 ec的可能取值, 从而可以根据 UE 的反馈结果来判决得到最优 。 具体地, 这里可以使用的一种反馈结果是In other words, in the training phase, the possible values of e c are sequentially traversed, so that the optimal decision can be made according to the feedback result of the UE. Specifically, one kind of feedback result that can be used here is
UE发送的信道质量指示 ( Channel Quality Indication , CQI )。 当训练阶段的 持续时间固定时, 可以在训练阶段结束时执行上述判决, 这样便于实现。 如 果在训练阶段结束时无法判决得到最优 ec, 则可以按照上一工作阶段所使用 的 执行下一工作阶段,或者有可能需要迁移至失锁态继续训练以得到稳定 的最优 ec。 Channel Quality Indication (CQI) sent by the UE. When the duration of the training phase is fixed, the above decision can be performed at the end of the training phase, which is convenient to implement. If the optimal e c cannot be determined at the end of the training phase, the next working phase may be performed according to the previous working phase, or it may be necessary to migrate to the unlocked state to continue training to obtain a stable optimal e c .
另一方面, 当工作阶段的持续时间固定时, 在按照固定的 ec进行列相位 旋转直至工作阶段期满时, 可以强制进入训练阶段。 最优 ec工作阶段期间有 可能变得不再适合, 即不再是最优的,导致系统性能变差。按照上述实施例, 在工作阶段期满时强制进入训练阶段以重新寻找最优 ec, 即使出现这种问 题, 也能够使得负面影响尽量减小。 On the other hand, when the duration of the working phase is fixed, the column phase rotation according to the fixed e c can be forced into the training phase when the working phase expires. During the optimal e c working phase, it may become unsuitable, that is, it is no longer optimal, resulting in poor system performance. According to the above embodiment, when the working phase expires, the training phase is forced to re-find the optimal e c , and even if such a problem occurs, the negative influence can be minimized.
最优 不一定是工作阶段之前所使用的最后一个 或者不一定是工作 阶段之后采用的第一个 ec。 在此情况下, 如果在进入工作阶段之后立刻使用 最优 进行列相位旋转, 有可能导致 ec剧烈变化, 影响系统性能的稳定性。 因此, 可以仅仅在工作阶段中的部分时间内使用固定的 ec进行列相位旋转, 而在工作阶段的其余时间(如工作阶段的初始一段时间和 /或结束前的一段时
间) 中采用相位连续性处理, 以减小 ec的变化对系统性能的影响。 The optimal is not necessarily the last e c used before the work phase or not necessarily the first e c used after the work phase. In this case, if the optimal column phase rotation is used immediately after entering the working phase, it may cause a sharp change in e c , which affects the stability of the system performance. Therefore, column phase rotation can be performed using only a fixed e c for part of the working phase, but for the rest of the working phase (eg, the initial period of the working phase and/or the period before the end) Phase continuity processing is used to reduce the impact of changes in e c on system performance.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 当工作阶段期满时进入训练阶段的情况下, 可以在训练阶段的初始一段时间内,逐步地将列相位从工作阶段中使用的固 定的 ee变化至训练阶段的列相位初始更新值。列相位初始更新值是训练阶段 中遍历列相位的初始起点值,例如可以是所有可能 ec取值中的最小值或最大 值。 换句话说, 按照小步长逐渐地改变相位, 而不是直接将 ec变化至列相位 初始更新值, 这种相位连续性处理可以尽量保证系统性能的稳定。 Optionally, as another embodiment, when the working phase enters the training phase, the column phase may be gradually changed from the fixed e e used in the working phase to the initial period of the training phase. The initial phase of the column phase update value during the training phase. The column phase initial update value is the initial starting value for traversing the column phase in the training phase, for example, may be the minimum or maximum of all possible e c values. In other words, the phase is gradually changed according to the small step size, instead of directly changing the e c to the initial update value of the column phase. This phase continuity processing can ensure the stability of the system performance as much as possible.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 在训练阶段中, 可以依据 UE上报的信道质 量指示 ( Channel Quality Indication, CQI )来确定最优相位, 例如可以认为 上报的 CQI最大时的相位是最优相位。 具体地, 在训练阶段中, 获取每个更 新后的 θ。下 ΜΙΜΟ用户设备对应上报的单流 CQI。 然后根据 MIMO用户设 备对应上报的单流 CQI获取最优列相位。 当训练阶段期满时,根据最优列相 位确定是否进行选择状态的迁移。 Optionally, as another embodiment, in the training phase, the optimal phase may be determined according to a Channel Quality Indication (CQI) reported by the UE, for example, the phase at which the reported CQI is maximum is the optimal phase. . Specifically, in the training phase, each updated θ is obtained. The single-flow CQI reported by the user equipment. Then, the optimal column phase is obtained according to the single-flow CQI corresponding to the reported MIMO user equipment. When the training phase expires, it is determined whether or not to perform the migration of the selected state based on the optimal column phase.
可选地,作为另一实施例,在根据 MIMO用户设备对应上报的单流 CQI 获取最优列相位时, 可对当前 ec下获取的单流 CQI进行求和得到第一总和 值, 对当前 θε下获取的单流 CQI进行计数得到第一计数值(即, 第一计数 值等于当前 下获取的单流 CQI的数目 )。 然后, 根据第一总和值和第一计 数值得到当前 的锁定性能值和失锁性能值。在遍历所有 之后,将所有 ec 中锁定性能值最大的 θε确定为最优列相位。 Optionally, as another embodiment, when the optimal column phase is obtained according to the single-flow CQI reported by the MIMO user equipment, the single-stream CQI obtained under the current e c may be summed to obtain a first sum value, and the current sum is The single stream CQI acquired under θ ε is counted to obtain a first count value (ie, the first count value is equal to the number of single stream CQIs currently acquired). Then, the current lock performance value and the lockout performance value are obtained according to the first sum value and the first count value. After traversing all, the θ ε with the highest locking performance value in all e c is determined as the optimal column phase.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 在根据第一总和值和第一计数值得到当前 ec 的锁定性能值和失锁性能值时, 可将第一总和值除以第一计数值得到第一平 均值。 可选地, 当第一计数值为 0时, 可以将第一平均值设为 0。 另外, 可 以对第一平均值进行预处理(例如进行 Alpha滤波)得到上述锁定性能值和 失锁性能值。 Optionally, as another embodiment, when the lock performance value and the lockout performance value of the current e c are obtained according to the first sum value and the first count value, the first sum value may be divided by the first count value to obtain the first An average value. Alternatively, when the first count value is 0, the first average value may be set to zero. In addition, the first average value may be pre-processed (for example, subjected to Alpha filtering) to obtain the above-described lock performance value and lock-loss performance value.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 当训练阶段期满时, 可按照以下方式判决是 否执行选择状态的迁移。应注意,以下判决方式仅仅是本发明的一种实施例, 如果当前的选择状态为失锁态: Alternatively, as another embodiment, when the training phase expires, the migration of the selected state may be determined in the following manner. It should be noted that the following decision mode is only one embodiment of the present invention, if the current selection state is an unlocked state:
当最优列相位的锁定性能值不低于所有 的锁定性能值的平均值与第 一阈值之和并且最优列相位的失锁性能值不低于所有 的失锁性能值的平 均值与第二阈值之和时, 确定选择状态从失锁态迁移至锁定态;
当最优列相位的锁定性能值低于所有 的锁定性能值的平均值与第一 阈值之和或者最优列相位的失锁性能值低于所有 的失锁性能值的平均值 与第二阈值之和时, 确定选择状态不迁移。 When the optimal column phase lock performance value is not lower than the sum of the average value of all the lock performance values and the first threshold value, and the optimal column phase lockout performance value is not lower than the average value of all the lockout performance values and the When the sum of the two thresholds is determined, it is determined that the selected state transitions from the unlocked state to the locked state; When the optimal column phase lock performance value is lower than the sum of the average of all the lock performance values and the first threshold or the optimal column phase lock loss performance value is lower than the average value and the second threshold of all the lockout performance values When the sum is selected, it is determined that the selection state is not migrated.
或者, 如果当前的选择状态为锁定态: Or, if the current selection state is locked:
当最优列相位的失锁性能值低于所有 的失锁性能值的平均值与第三 阈值之和时, 确定选择状态从锁定态迁移至失锁态; Determining that the selected state transitions from the locked state to the unlocked state when the loss of the optimal column phase is lower than the sum of the average of all the loss-of-lock performance values and the third threshold;
当最优列相位的失锁性能值不低于所有 θ。的失锁性能值的平均值与第 三阈值之和时, 确定选择状态不迁移, 根据最优列相位确定下一工作阶段中 使用的固定的 θ^々取值。 When the optimal column phase has a loss-locking performance value not lower than all θ. When the average value of the loss-of-lock performance value is equal to the third threshold, it is determined that the selected state is not migrated, and the fixed θ^ value used in the next working phase is determined according to the optimal column phase.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 在根据最优列相位确定下一工作阶段中使用 的固定的 ec的取值时, 当最优列相位和上一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec之 间的差异大于第四阈值时,将最优列相位作为下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec; 否则将上一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec作为下一工作阶段中使用的固定 的 ec。 Optionally, as another embodiment, when determining the value of the fixed e c used in the next working phase according to the optimal column phase, when the optimal column phase and the fixed e c used in the previous working phase are When the difference is greater than the fourth threshold, the optimal column phase is used as the fixed e c used in the next working phase; otherwise, the fixed e c used in the previous working phase is used as the fixed in the next working phase. E c .
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 在将最优列相位作为下一工作阶段中使用的 固定的 ec时, 可以在下一工作阶段的初始一段时间内,逐步地将列相位从所 述训练阶段的列相位结束更新值变化至最优列相位。 列相位结束更新值是训 练阶段中遍历列相位的最后一个值,例如可以是所有可能 ec取值中的最大值 或最小值。 换句话说, 按照小步长逐渐地改变相位, 而不是直接将 ec变化至 最优列相位, 这种相位连续性处理可以尽量保证系统性能的稳定。 Optionally, as another embodiment, when the optimal column phase is used as the fixed e c used in the next working phase, the column phase may be gradually stepped from the training during the initial period of the next working phase. The column phase end update value of the phase changes to the optimal column phase. The column phase end update value is the last value that traverses the column phase in the training phase, for example, may be the maximum or minimum of all possible e c values. In other words, the phase is gradually changed according to the small step size, instead of directly changing the e c to the optimal column phase. This phase continuity processing can ensure the stability of the system performance as much as possible.
下面结合具体实施例, 更加详细地描述本发明实施例中最优列相位的选 择流程。 The selection process of the optimum column phase in the embodiment of the present invention will be described in more detail below with reference to specific embodiments.
图 3是本发明一个实施例的增强 VAM方案的例子的示意图。 3 is a schematic diagram of an example of an enhanced VAM scheme in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention.
在图 3的实施例中, 上述 VAM矩阵的形式为 2阶正交实矩阵, 但本发 明实施例对 VAM矩阵的形式不作限制。 In the embodiment of FIG. 3, the form of the VAM matrix is a second-order orthogonal real matrix, but the embodiment of the present invention does not limit the form of the VAM matrix.
另外, 为了筒洁, 图 3的实施例中, 描绘了 n=2的特例, 但本发明实施 例对 n的具体取值不作限制, 同样可以应用于更多路信号的情形。 In addition, for the sake of cleaning, in the embodiment of Fig. 3, a special case of n = 2 is depicted, but the specific value of n is not limited in the embodiment of the present invention, and the same can be applied to the case of more signals.
具体地, 图 3的实施例是主辅导频模式下 MIMO和 HSDPA共载波组网 时, 采用的两天线 VAM架构示意图。 Specifically, the embodiment of FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a two-antenna VAM architecture used in the MIMO and HSDPA co-carrier networking in the primary tuner mode.
如图 3 所示, 整个 SS-MIMO信号包括 DS-MIM01 和 DS-MIM02。 As shown in Figure 3, the entire SS-MIMO signal includes DS-MIM01 and DS-MIM02.
DS-MIMOl和 DS-MIM02的加权通过 PCI矩阵 301和 VAM矩阵 302级联
完成。 VAM矩阵 302的输入端口称为虚拟天线, 即图 3所示的第一虚拟天 线 303和第二虚拟天线 304。 在各个虚拟天线上输入的信号称为虚拟天线信 号, 如图 3所示的 VI和 V2。 其中 VI基于 HSDPA信号、 DS-MIM01信号、 主公共导频信道 ( Primary Common Pilot Channel , P-CPICH ) 和公共 ( Common )信道; V2基于 DS-MIM02信号和辅公共导频信道( Secondary Common Pilot Channel , S-CPICH )„ The weighting of DS-MIMO1 and DS-MIM02 is cascaded through PCI matrix 301 and VAM matrix 302 carry out. The input port of the VAM matrix 302 is referred to as a virtual antenna, that is, the first virtual antenna 303 and the second virtual antenna 304 shown in FIG. The signals input on the respective virtual antennas are referred to as virtual antenna signals, such as VI and V2 shown in FIG. VI is based on HSDPA signal, DS-MIM01 signal, Primary Common Pilot Channel (P-CPICH) and common (Common) channel; V2 is based on DS-MIM02 signal and secondary common pilot channel (Second Common Pilot Channel) , S-CPICH )„
在输入 VAM矩阵 302之前,在列调相单元 305处,对第二虚拟天线 304 上的虚拟天线信号 V2进行列相位旋转, 即乘以 e^ , 其中, 0e为相应的列 相位。 Prior to inputting the VAM matrix 302, at the column phase modulating unit 305, the virtual antenna signal V2 on the second virtual antenna 304 is phase rotated, i.e., multiplied by e^, where 0e is the corresponding column phase.
然后, VAM矩阵 302将所有虚拟天线信号 (包括未进行列相位旋转的 VI , 以及对 V2进行了列相位旋转之后得到的旋转信号)乘以正交的 VAM 矩阵, 从而得到两路输出信号。 两路输出信号经过功放器 PA1和 PA2之后, 作为物理天线信号 S1和 S2, 分别通过两路天线 311和 312发射出去。 Then, the VAM matrix 302 multiplies all of the virtual antenna signals (including the VI that has not undergone phase rotation of the column and the rotation signal obtained by phase-rotating V2) by the orthogonal VAM matrix, thereby obtaining two output signals. After the two output signals pass through the power amplifiers PA1 and PA2, they are transmitted as physical antenna signals S1 and S2 through the two antennas 311 and 312, respectively.
VAM矩阵的一个例 An example of a VAM matrix
需要说明的是, VAM矩阵可以有多种形式, 不限于上述具体例子。 列调相因子 θε决定着发射信号的极化形态, 最优列调相位和 UE的摆放 位置以及无线环境都有关系, 因此小区中的不同 UE的最优相位不同, 故可 以通过列调相位的周期旋转来提升 SS-MIMO的性能。 It should be noted that the VAM matrix may have various forms, and is not limited to the specific examples described above. The column phase modulation factor θ ε determines the polarization form of the transmitted signal. The optimal column phase is related to the placement position of the UE and the wireless environment. Therefore, the optimal phase of different UEs in the cell is different, so it can be adjusted. The periodic rotation of the phase improves the performance of SS-MIMO.
图 4是本发明一个实施例的进行最优列相位选择的方法的示意流程图。 例如, 图 4的方法可以应用于图 3所示的 VAM架构。 4 is a schematic flow diagram of a method of performing optimal column phase selection in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention. For example, the method of Figure 4 can be applied to the VAM architecture shown in Figure 3.
401 , 初始化阶段。 401, initialization phase.
在初始化阶段中,进行如下设置:将锁定标志的初值置为 0 (即 Lockflag = 0 ), 列相位 ^为 0, 相关变量清零。 In the initialization phase, the following settings are made: the initial value of the lock flag is set to 0 (ie, Lockflag = 0), the column phase ^ is 0, and the associated variable is cleared.
402, 确定进入训练阶段。 402, determined to enter the training phase.
例如, 在确定为失锁态时, 确定进入训练模式。 或者, 在确定为锁定态, 且工作阶段期满时, 确定进入训练模式。 然后, 根据预设的 N个列相位进行 遍历。 For example, when it is determined to be in a lost lock state, it is determined to enter the training mode. Or, when it is determined to be in a locked state, and the working phase expires, it is determined to enter the training mode. Then, traverse according to the preset N column phases.
403 , 列相位计时器归零。 403, the column phase timer is reset to zero.
换句话说, 设定列相位计时器 ProcPrdTimer = 0。 将本次遍历的列相位 记为第 (i+1 ) 个列相位, 其中, i的取值为 0~ ( N-1 )。
404, 统计该列相位下的性能。 In other words, set the column phase timer ProcPrdTimer = 0. The column phase of this traversal is recorded as the (i+1)th column phase, where i takes the value 0~(N-1). 404, statistics performance under the phase of the column.
针对第 ( i+1 )个列相位, 对 MIMO用户上^艮的单流 CQI进行求和、 计 数 , 分别 己作 CqiSum[i]和 CqiCounter[i]。 For the (i+1)th column phase, the single-flow CQI of the MIMO user is summed and counted, and CqiSum[i] and CqiCounter[i] are respectively used.
405 , 判断该列相位训练阶段是否期满。 405. Determine whether the phase training phase of the column expires.
当 ProcPrdTimer = ProcPrd时, 第 ( i+1 )个列相位训练阶段期满, 继续 步骤 406。 否则, 训练阶段尚未期满, 跳转到步骤 404。 这里, ProcPrd是训 练阶段的时长。 When ProcPrdTimer = ProcPrd, the (i+1)th column phase training phase expires, and step 406 is continued. Otherwise, the training phase has not expired and jumps to step 404. Here, ProcPrd is the length of the training phase.
406, 对该列相位下的性能进行预处理。 406, pre-processing the performance of the column phase.
第 ( i+1 ) 个列相位训练阶段期满时, 得到其性能结果 CqiPer[i]= C^lSum^ ,其中 CqiCoiMer[i ≠ 0。若计数为 0 ,则当前的 CqiPer[i]保 When the (i+1)th phase training phase expires, the performance result CqiPer[i]= C ^ lSum ^ is obtained, where CqiCoiMer[i ≠ 0. If the count is 0, the current CqiPer[i] guarantee
CqiCounter[i] CqiCounter[i]
护为 0。 对训练得到的性能结果¾/ 小]进行预处理。 Protected to 0. The performance results obtained from the training are 3⁄4/small] preprocessed.
例如, 对该性能结果¾/ r[/]进行 Alpha滤波, 更新第 (i+1 )个列相位 的 性 能 结 果 , StaCqilock[i]=StaCqilock[i] x (l- clock )+CqiPer[i] x alock , StaCqiunlock[i]=StaCqiunlock[i] x i -ocunlock )+CqiPer[i] x unlock , 并将变量 CqiSum[i] 、 CqiCounter[i]和 CqiPerii]清零。 这里 StoC^ZocWi]即为上述锁定性能值, C^^ [i]即为上述失锁性能值。 其中, aunlock > alock , 用于快速跟踪 最优列相位的变化, 以触发锁定态到失锁态的迁移, 更快地搜集训练样本; alock用于精确选择锁定的最优相位, 并联合 aunlock来触发失锁态到锁定态的迁 移。 具体地, 锁定态到失锁态的迁移和失锁态到锁定态的迁移判断过程如前 文所述, 为避免重复, 在此不再赘述。 For example, Alpha filtering is performed on the performance result 3⁄4/r[/] to update the performance result of the (i+1)th column phase, StaCqilock[i]=StaCqilock[i] x (l-c lock )+CqiPer[i ] xa lock , StaCqiunlock[i]=StaCqiunlock[i] xi -oc unlock )+CqiPer[i] x unlock , and clear the variables CqiSum[i] , CqiCounter[i] and CqiPerii]. Here StoC^ZocWi] is the above lock performance value, and C^^[i] is the above-mentioned lockout performance value. Where a lock > a lock is used to quickly track the change of the optimal column phase to trigger the migration from the lock state to the unlocked state, and collect the training samples faster; a lock is used to accurately select the optimal phase of the lock, and Joint a unlock to trigger the migration of the lock-up state to the lock state. Specifically, the transition process from the lock state to the lock-up state and the transition state of the lock-up state to the lock state are as described above. To avoid repetition, details are not described herein again.
407, 判断是否遍历了所有的列相位。 407, determine whether all column phases are traversed.
如果已经遍历了所有的 N个列相位, 则继续步骤 408, 否则, 跳转到步 骤 403。 例如, 当 i = N-l时, 确定已经遍历完所有的列相位。 当 i < N-l时, 确定尚未遍历完所有的列相位。 If all N column phases have been traversed, then step 408 is continued, otherwise, a jump to step 403. For example, when i = N-l, it is determined that all column phases have been traversed. When i < N-l, it is determined that all column phases have not been traversed.
408, 确定最优列相位。 408, determining an optimal column phase.
从前述得到的 N个 StaCqi ckli]值中确定最大值,将该最大值的索引值对 应的列相位作为最优性能对应的列相位, 称为最优列相位。 假设最大值为 StaCqilock[n , n的取值为 0~ ( N-1 ), 则 n为索引值, 其对应的第 (n+1 ) 个 列相位为最优列相位。 The maximum value is determined from the N StaCqi ckli values obtained as described above, and the column phase corresponding to the index value of the maximum value is taken as the column phase corresponding to the optimal performance, which is called the optimal column phase. Assuming that the maximum value is StaCqilock[n and n is 0~(N-1), then n is the index value, and the corresponding (n+1)th column phase is the optimal column phase.
409, 判决是否锁定该最优列相位。 409, determining whether to lock the optimal column phase.
如果 Lockflag=0, 根据设定的最优列相位锁定规则判决是否锁定最优性
能对应的最优列相位。 例如, 判断最优性能 StoC^tocWn]是否不低于 Mean(StaCqilock[i]) + ThreshA , 其中, Mi¾m0¾<2(¾ tod [ ])为前述得到的 N 个 StaCqilock[i]的平均值, ThreshA为预设的门限值。 判断 StaCqiunlock[n]是否不^ ί氐 于 Mean(StaCqiunlock[i]) + ThreshB , 其中, Mean(StaCqiunlock[i] 为前述得到的 N 个 StaCqiun ck[i]的平均值, ThreshB为预设的门限值。 If Lockflag=0, decide whether to lock the optimality according to the set optimal column phase locking rule. The optimal column phase that can be matched. For example, determine whether the optimal performance StoC^tocWn] is not lower than Mean(StaCqilock[i]) + ThreshA , where Mi3⁄4m03⁄4<2(3⁄4 tod [ ]) is the average of the N StaCqilock[i] obtained in the foregoing, ThreshA Is the preset threshold. Determine whether StaCqiunlock[n] is not ^ 氐 M Mean(StaCqiunlock[i]) + ThreshB , where Mean(StaCqiunlock[i] is the average of the N StaCqiun ck[i] obtained above, and ThreshB is the default gate Limit.
具体地, 如果 αί^ Ζί^Μη ρ αί /ίΖί^Μη]均不氐于对应的 (平均值+门 限值), 则将锁定标志置为 1 , 即 Lockflag = l , 并将列相位 U殳定为索引值 n对应的列相位值, 即最优列相位。 否则, 锁定标志不变, 仍设置为 0, 即 Lockflag = 0 , 并跳转到步骤 403。 Specifically, if αί^ Ζί^Μη ρ αί /ίΖί^Μη] is not inconsistent with the corresponding (average value + threshold value), the lock flag is set to 1, that is, Lockflag = l, and the column phase U殳The column phase value corresponding to the index value n is determined, that is, the optimal column phase. Otherwise, the lock flag is unchanged, still set to 0, that is, Lockflag = 0, and jumps to step 403.
如果 Lockflag = 1 , 根据设定的最优相位锁定规则判决是否需要跳出锁 定 态 。 例 如 , 比 较 最 优 性 能 StaCqiunlock[n] 是 否 不 低 于 Mean(StaCqiunlock[i]) + ThreshC , 其中, Meim toG^ toc ])为前述得到的 N个 StaCqiunlock[i]的平均值, ThreshC为预设的门限值。 If Lockflag = 1 , it is determined according to the set optimal phase lock rule whether it needs to jump out of the lock state. For example, whether the optimal performance StaCqiunlock[n] is not lower than Mean(StaCqiunlock[i]) + ThreshC , where Meim toG^ toc ]) is the average of the N StaCqiunlock[i] obtained in the foregoing, and ThreshC is the default. Threshold.
具体地, 如果最优性能 C^^tocWn]低于(平均值 +门限值), 则将锁定 标志置为 0 ,即 Lockflag = 0 ,并跳转到步骤 403。如果最优性能 StaCqiim ckln] 不低于(平均值 +门限值), 根据最优列相位锁定规则判决是否锁定在最优性 能 StaCqiunlock[n]对应的新的列相位。上述最优列相位锁定规则可以是:例如, 比较该新的列相位的性能和上一个工作阶段使用的最优列相位的性能, 当比 较所得的差异大于预设的门限值时才进行最优列相位更新, 否则, 不更新最 优列相位。 应理解, 任何为了性能考虑, 在最优列相位更新阶段进行的相位 连续性处理也在落在本发明实施例的保护范围内。 Specifically, if the optimal performance C^^tocWn] is lower than (average + threshold), the lock flag is set to 0, that is, Lockflag = 0, and jumps to step 403. If the optimal performance StaCqiim ckln] is not lower than (average + threshold), it is determined according to the optimal column phase locking rule whether to lock the new column phase corresponding to the optimal performance StaCqiunlock[n]. The above optimal column phase locking rule may be, for example, comparing the performance of the new column phase with the performance of the optimal column phase used in the previous working phase, and performing the most when the comparison difference is greater than a preset threshold value. The phase is updated, otherwise the optimal column phase is not updated. It should be understood that any phase continuity processing performed during the optimal column phase update phase for performance considerations also falls within the scope of protection of embodiments of the present invention.
410, 进入工作阶段。 410, enter the work phase.
如果 Lockflag = 1 , 列相位训练结束, 启动工作阶段定时器 WorkPrdTimer„ If Lockflag = 1, the column phase training ends, and the working phase timer WorkPrdTimer is started.
411 , 固定最优列相位。 411, fixed optimal column phase.
固定前述确定的 θ ι为新的最优列相位。 The previously determined θ ι is fixed as the new optimal column phase.
412, 判断工作阶段是否期满。 412, judge whether the work phase expires.
当工作阶段期满,即 WorkPrdTimer = WorkPrd时,准备跳出固定列相位, 进入到训练阶段流程,即跳转到步骤 401。否则,继续步骤 411。这里, WorkPrd 是工作阶段的时长。 应理解, 由于最优列相位和初始设置的首个列相位可能 不同, 任何为了性能考虑, 在从工作阶段的固定列相位向训练阶段跳转时进
行的列相位连续性处理也落在本发明是实施例的保护范围内。 When the working phase expires, that is, WorkPrdTimer = WorkPrd, it is ready to jump out of the fixed column phase, and enter the training phase process, that is, jump to step 401. Otherwise, proceed to step 411. Here, WorkPrd is the length of the work phase. It should be understood that since the optimal column phase and the initial column phase of the initial setting may be different, any for performance reasons, when jumping from the fixed column phase of the working phase to the training phase The column phase continuity processing of the rows also falls within the scope of protection of the embodiments of the present invention.
本发明实施例在将虚拟天线信号乘以 VAM矩阵之前, 对进行了 PCI加 权的全部或部分虚拟天线信号进行列相位旋转, 这种级联方式等价于扩展了 PCI码本个数, 从而能够修正受限码本带来的量化精度问题,提高 MIMO性 h In the embodiment of the present invention, before the virtual antenna signal is multiplied by the VAM matrix, the column phase rotation is performed on all or part of the virtual antenna signals subjected to PCI weighting. This cascading mode is equivalent to expanding the number of PCI codebooks, thereby enabling Correct the quantization accuracy problem caused by the restricted codebook and improve the MIMO performance h
J 匕。 J 匕.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 在步骤 102中得到 n个输出信号之后, 还可 以对其中的 k个输出信号进行相应的行相位旋转。将 n个输出信号中的 k个 输出信号进行相应的行相位旋转,得到 k个第二旋转信号,其中 k为正整数。 对未进行行相位旋转的 n-k个输出信号和 k个第二旋转信号进行功放处理以0 得到 n个物理天线信号。这样的行相位旋转能够使得 n个物理天线信号中至 少有两个物理天线信号之间存在相位差。 Optionally, as another embodiment, after the n output signals are obtained in step 102, corresponding k phase rotations may be performed on the k output signals. The k output signals of the n output signals are subjected to corresponding row phase rotation to obtain k second rotation signals, where k is a positive integer. The n-k output signals and the k second rotation signals that are not phase-rotated are subjected to power amplifier processing to obtain n physical antenna signals. Such a line phase rotation enables a phase difference between at least two of the n physical antenna signals.
可选地,作为另一实施例,在对 n个虚拟天线信号中的 m个虚拟天线信 号进行相应的列相位旋转时, 可将 k个输出信号与 ^相乘, 其中, 为与 k个输出信号相应的行相位, r为虚拟天线信号的序号, rE [l,k]。 Optionally, as another embodiment, when the m virtual antenna signals in the n virtual antenna signals are rotated in the corresponding column phase, the k output signals may be multiplied by ^, where, for the k outputs The corresponding line phase of the signal, r is the sequence number of the virtual antenna signal, rE [l, k].
5 可选地, 作为另一实施例, 在步骤 101之前, 还可以确定 {θε, er}组合的 选择状态, 上述 {ee, ej组合的选择状态包括锁定态和失锁态。 然后,根据 Optionally, as another embodiment, before step 101, a selection state of a combination of {θ ε , e r } may be determined, where the selected state of the {e e , ej combination includes a locked state and an unlocked state. Then, according to
组合的选择状态确定 {ee, ej组合的选择阶段。 具体地, 当确定 {ee, ej组合 的选择状态为失锁态时,确定 组合的选择阶段为训练阶段; 当确定 {ec, er}组合的选择状态为锁定态时,确定 {θ 组合的选择阶段为交替的训练阶0 段和工作阶段。在此情况下,在步骤 101中对 n个虚拟天线信号中的 m个虚 拟天线信号进行相应的列相位旋转时, 可根据 {ee, 组合的选择阶段进行行 相位旋转。 同理, 上述对 n个输出信号中的 k个输出信号进行相应的行相位 旋转时, 可根据 {θ 组合的选择阶段进行列相位旋转。 The combined selection state determines the selection phase of {e e , ej combination. Specifically, when it is determined that the selection state of the {e e , ej combination is the unlocked state, the selection phase of the combination is determined as the training phase; when it is determined that the selected state of the combination of {e c , e r } is the locked state, determining {θ The selection phase of the combination is the alternating training phase 0 segment and the working phase. In this case, when the corresponding column phase rotation is performed on the m virtual antenna signals of the n virtual antenna signals in step 101, the line phase rotation may be performed according to the selection phase of {e e . Similarly, when the corresponding line phase rotation is performed on the k output signals of the n output signals, the column phase rotation can be performed according to the selection phase of the {θ combination.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 在根据 组合的选择阶段, 进行列相位5 旋转和行相位旋转时, 在训练阶段中, 周期性地更新 {θε, 组合的取值, 并 按照更新后的 {θ^, 组合进行列相位旋转和行相位旋转。 在工作阶段中的至 少部分时间内, 使用固定的 组合进行列相位旋转和行相位旋转。 该固 定的 组合即为最优 组合。 Optionally, as another embodiment, when the column phase 5 rotation and the row phase rotation are performed according to the combined selection phase, in the training phase, {θ ε , the combined value is periodically updated, and according to the update The {θ^, combination performs column phase rotation and row phase rotation. Column phase rotation and row phase rotation are performed using a fixed combination for at least part of the working phase. This fixed combination is the optimal combination.
换句话说, 在训练阶段中, 依次遍历 {θ er}组合的可能取值, 从而可以0 根据 UE的反馈结果来判决得到最优 {θ 组合。 当训练阶段的持续时间固 定时, 可以在训练阶段结束时执行上述判决, 这样便于实现。 如果在训练阶
段结束时无法判决得到最优 组合, 则可以按照上一工作阶段所使用的 {θ0, 组合执行下一工作阶段, 或者有可能需要迁移至失锁态继续训练以得 到稳定的最优 组合。 In other words, in the training phase, the possible values of the {θ e r } combination are traversed in order, so that the optimal {θ combination can be determined according to the feedback result of the UE. When the duration of the training phase is fixed, the above decision can be performed at the end of the training phase, which is convenient to implement. If in training At the end of the segment, the optimal combination cannot be determined. Then, according to the {θ 0 used in the previous working phase, the next working phase can be combined, or it may be necessary to migrate to the unlocked state to continue training to obtain a stable optimal combination.
另一方面, 当工作阶段的持续时间固定时, 在按照固定的 {ec, ej组合进 行列相位旋转直至工作阶段期满时, 可以强制进入训练阶段。 最优 组 合工作阶段期间有可能变得不再适合,即不再是最优的,导致系统性能变差。 按照上述实施例, 在工作阶段期满时强制进入训练阶段以重新寻找最优 {ec, 组合, 即使出现这种问题, 也能够使得负面影响尽量减小。 On the other hand, when the duration of the working phase is fixed, the phase phase rotation is performed according to the fixed {e c , ej combination until the working phase expires, and the training phase can be forced. During the optimal combination work phase, it may become unsuitable, that is, it is no longer optimal, resulting in poor system performance. According to the above embodiment, when the working phase expires, the training phase is forced to re-find the optimal {e c , combination, and even if such a problem occurs, the negative influence can be minimized.
可选地,作为另一实施例,在训练阶段中,可以获取每个更新后的 {0C, ΘΓ} 组合下 ΜΙΜΟ用户设备对应上报的单流信道质量指示 CQI。 根据 MIMO用 户设备对应上报的单流 CQI获取最优 {θ ΘΓ}组合。 当训练阶段期满时,根据 最优 {ee, 组合确定是否进行选择状态的迁移。 Optionally, as another embodiment, in the training phase, each updated {0 C , Θ Γ } combination may be used to obtain a single stream channel quality indication CQI corresponding to the user equipment. The optimal {θ Θ Γ } combination is obtained according to the single-flow CQI reported by the MIMO user equipment. When the training phase expires, according to the optimal {e e , the combination determines whether to perform the migration of the selected state.
可选地,作为另一实施例,在根据 MIMO用户设备对应上报的单流 CQI 获取最优列相位时,对当前 {θ 组合下获取的单流 CQI进行求和得到第二 总和值, 对当前 {θ^, θ^组合下获取的单流 CQI进行计数得到第二计数值。根 据第二总和值和第二计数值得到当前 { , 组合的锁定性能值和失锁性能 值。在遍历所有 {θ 组合之后,将所有 组合中锁定性能值最大的 {ec, er)组合确定为最优 组合。 Optionally, as another embodiment, when the optimal column phase is obtained according to the single-flow CQI corresponding to the MIMO user equipment, the current single-stream CQI obtained by the current {θ combination is summed to obtain a second total value, and the current sum is The single-flow CQI obtained under the combination of {θ^, θ^ is counted to obtain a second count value. The current { , combined locking performance value and the lost lock performance value are obtained according to the second sum value and the second count value. After traversing all {θ combinations, the combination of {e c , e r ) that maximizes the lock performance value of all combinations is determined as the optimal combination.
可选地,作为另一实施例,在根据第二总和值和第二计数值得到当前 { , 组合的锁定性能值和失锁性能值时,可将第二总和值除以第二计数值得到 第二平均值。 可选地, 当第二计数值为 0时, 可以将第二平均值设为 0。 另 夕卜, 可以对第二平均值进行预处理(例如进行 Alpha滤波)得到锁定性能值 和失锁性能值。 Optionally, as another embodiment, when the current { , combined lock performance value and the lock loss performance value are obtained according to the second sum value and the second count value, the second sum value may be divided by the second count value. Second average. Alternatively, when the second count value is 0, the second average value may be set to zero. Alternatively, the second average may be pre-processed (e.g., alpha-filtered) to obtain a lock performance value and a lock-loss performance value.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 当训练阶段期满时, 可以根据以下方式判决 是否执行选择状态的迁移。 应注意, 以下判决方式仅仅是本发明的一种实施 如果当前的选择状态为失锁态: Optionally, as another embodiment, when the training phase expires, whether to perform the migration of the selected state may be determined according to the following manner. It should be noted that the following decision mode is only one implementation of the present invention. If the current selection state is an unlocked state:
当最优 { , 组合的锁定性能值不低于所有 { , 组合的锁定性能值 的平均值与第一阈值之和并且最优列相位的失锁性能值不低于所有 {θ ΘΓ} 组合的失锁性能值的平均值与第二阈值之和时,确定选择状态从失锁态迁移 至锁定态;
当最优 { , 组合的锁定性能值低于所有 { , 组合的锁定性能值的 平均值与第一阈值之和或者最优 { , 组合的失锁性能值低于所有 { , er} 组合的失锁性能值的平均值与第二阈值之和时, 确定选择状态不迁移; When the optimal { , the combined locking performance value is not lower than all { , the sum of the average of the combined locking performance values and the first threshold and the optimal column phase unlocking performance value is not lower than all {θ Θ Γ } combinations When the average value of the loss-of-lock performance value is equal to the second threshold, it is determined that the selected state transitions from the unlocked state to the locked state; When the optimal { , the combined locking performance value is lower than all { , the sum of the combined locking performance value and the first threshold or the optimal { , the combined loss-of-lock performance value is lower than all { , e r } combinations When the average value of the lockout performance value is equal to the second threshold, it is determined that the selected state does not migrate;
或者, 如果当前的选择状态为锁定态: Or, if the current selection state is locked:
当最优 { , 组合的失锁性能值低于所有 { , 组合的失锁性能值的 平均值与第三阈值之和时, 确定选择状态从锁定态迁移至失锁态; When the optimal { , the combined loss-of-lock performance value is lower than the sum of all { , the combined average value of the lost lock performance value and the third threshold, determining that the selected state transitions from the locked state to the unlocked state;
当最优 { , 组合的失锁性能值不低于所有 { , 组合的失锁性能值 的平均值与第三阈值之和时, 确定选择状态不迁移, 根据最优 组合确 定下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 {Θ 组合的取值。 When the optimal { , combined loss-of-lock performance value is not lower than all { , the sum of the average value of the combined loss-of-lock performance value and the third threshold, it is determined that the selected state does not migrate, and the next working phase is determined according to the optimal combination. The value of the fixed {Θ combination used.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 在根据最优 组合确定下一工作阶段中 使用的固定的 {ec, 组合的取值时, 当最优 {ec, 组合和上一工作阶段中使 用的固定的 {ee, 组合之间的差异大于第四阈值时, 将最优 {ee, 组合作为 下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 {θ 组合; 否则将上一工作阶段中使用的固 定的 {ec, 组合作为下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 {θ 组合。 Optionally, as another embodiment, when the fixed {e c , the combined value used in the next working phase is determined according to the optimal combination, when the optimal {e c , the combination and the previous working phase are used Fixed {e e , when the difference between the combinations is greater than the fourth threshold, the optimal {e e , combination is used as the fixed {θ combination used in the next work phase; otherwise it will be fixed in the previous work phase {e c , the combination is used as the fixed {θ combination used in the next working phase.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 列相位的取值范围可以小于行相位的取值范 围。 但本发明实施例对的具体取值范围和取值步长不作限制。 Optionally, as another embodiment, the range of values of the column phase may be smaller than the range of values of the row phase. However, the specific value range and the value step of the embodiment of the present invention are not limited.
下面结合具体实施例, 更加详细地描述本发明实施例中最优相位组合的 选择流程。 The selection process of the optimal phase combination in the embodiment of the present invention will be described in more detail below with reference to specific embodiments.
图 5是本发明另一实施例的增强 VAM方案的例子的示意图。 FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of an example of an enhanced VAM scheme according to another embodiment of the present invention.
在图 5的实施例中, 上述 VAM矩阵的形式为 1阶正交实矩阵, 但本发 明实施例对 VAM矩阵的形式不作限制。 In the embodiment of FIG. 5, the form of the VAM matrix is a first-order orthogonal real matrix, but the embodiment of the present invention does not limit the form of the VAM matrix.
另外, 为了筒洁, 图 5的实施例中, 描绘了 n=2的特例, 但本发明实施 例对 n的具体取值不作限制, 同样可以应用于更多路信号的情形。 In addition, for the sake of cleaning, in the embodiment of Fig. 5, a special example of n = 2 is depicted, but the specific value of n is not limited in the embodiment of the present invention, and the same can be applied to the case of more signals.
具体地, 图 5的实施例是主辅导频模式下 MIMO和 HSDPA共载波组网 时, 采用的两天线 VAM架构示意图。 Specifically, the embodiment of FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a two-antenna VAM architecture used in MIMO and HSDPA co-carrier networking in the primary tuner mode.
如图 5所示, 整个 SS-MIMO信号包括 DS-MIM01和 DS-MIM02, 其 加权通过 PCI矩阵 501和 VAM矩阵 502级联完成。 VAM矩阵 502的输入端 口称为虚拟天线, 即图 5所示的第一虚拟天线 503和第二虚拟天线 504。 在 各个虚拟天线上输入的信号称为虚拟天线信号,如图 5所示的 VI和 V2。其 中 VI基于 HSDPA信号、 DS-MIM01信号、主公共导频信道( Primary Common Pilot Channel, P-CPICH )和公共(Common )信道; V2基于 DS-MIM02信
号和辅公共导频信道 ( Secondary Common Pilot Channel , S-CPICH )。 As shown in FIG. 5, the entire SS-MIMO signal includes DS-MIM01 and DS-MIM02, and the weighting is completed by cascading the PCI matrix 501 and the VAM matrix 502. The input port of the VAM matrix 502 is referred to as a virtual antenna, that is, the first virtual antenna 503 and the second virtual antenna 504 shown in FIG. The signals input on the respective virtual antennas are referred to as virtual antenna signals, such as VI and V2 shown in FIG. VI is based on HSDPA signal, DS-MIM01 signal, Primary Common Pilot Channel (P-CPICH) and common (Common) channel; V2 is based on DS-MIM02 letter Number and Secondary Common Pilot Channel (S-CPICH).
在输入 VAM矩阵 502之前,在列调相单元 505处,对第二虚拟天线 504 上的虚拟天线信号 V2进行列相位旋转, 即乘以 e^ , 其中, 0e为相应的列 相位。 Prior to inputting the VAM matrix 502, at the column phase modulating unit 505, the virtual antenna signal V2 on the second virtual antenna 504 is phase rotated, i.e., multiplied by e^, where 0e is the corresponding column phase.
然后, VAM矩阵 502将所有虚拟天线信号 (包括未进行列相位旋转的 VI , 以及对 V2进行了列相位旋转之后得到的旋转信号)乘以正交的 VAM 矩阵, 从而得到两路输出信号 01和 02。 Then, the VAM matrix 502 multiplies all the virtual antenna signals (including the VI that has not undergone phase rotation of the column, and the rotation signal obtained after the column phase rotation of V2) by the orthogonal VAM matrix, thereby obtaining two output signals 01 and 02.
在输出 VAM矩阵 502之后, 在行调相单元 506处, 对输出 VAM矩阵 的一路输出信号 02进行行相位旋转, 即乘以 , 其中, 0R为相应的行相 位。 01和进行行相位旋转后的 02分别经过功放器 PA1和 PA2 , 之后作为 物理天线信号 S 1和 S2 , 分别通过两路天线 511和 512发射出去。 After outputting the VAM matrix 502, at the line phase modulating unit 506, an output signal 02 of the output VAM matrix is phase rotated, i.e., multiplied, where 0 R is the corresponding line phase. 01 and 02 after the phase rotation of the line pass through the power amplifiers PA1 and PA2, respectively, and then are transmitted as the physical antenna signals S1 and S2 through the two antennas 511 and 512, respectively.
VAM矩阵的一个例 An example of a VAM matrix
需要说明的是, VAM矩阵可以有多种形式, 不限于上述具体例子。 图 6 是本发明一个实施例的进行最优相位组合选择的方法的示意流程 图。 例如, 图 6的方法可以应用于图 5所示的 VAM架构。 It should be noted that the VAM matrix may have various forms, and is not limited to the specific examples described above. 6 is a schematic flow chart of a method for performing optimal phase combination selection according to an embodiment of the present invention. For example, the method of FIG. 6 can be applied to the VAM architecture shown in FIG.
601 , 初始化阶段。 601, initialization phase.
在初始化阶段中,进行如下设置:将锁定标志的初值置为 0 (即 Lockflag = 0 ), 列相位 ^为 0 , 行相位^ ^为 0 , 相关变量清零。 In the initialization phase, the following settings are made: the initial value of the lock flag is set to 0 (ie, Lockflag = 0), the column phase ^ is 0, the line phase ^^ is 0, and the associated variable is cleared.
602 , 确定进入训练阶段。 602, determine to enter the training phase.
例如, 在确定为失锁态时, 确定进入训练模式。 或者, 在确定为锁定态, 且工作阶段期满时, 确定进入训练模式。 然后,根据预设的 N个列相位和 M 个行相位构成的 Νχ Μ个组合, 进行遍历。 例如, 可以按照下表所示的纵向 箭^"一一遍历, 或者按照横向箭头 For example, when it is determined to be in a lost lock state, it is determined to enter the training mode. Or, when it is determined to be in a locked state, and the working phase expires, it is determined to enter the training mode. Then, traversal is performed according to a combination of preset N column phases and M row phases. For example, you can follow the vertical arrows shown in the table below, or follow the horizontal arrows.
603 , 相位组合计时器归零。 603, the phase combination timer is reset to zero.
换句话说, 设定列相位计时器 ProcPrdTimer = 0。 将本次遍历的相位组
合记为第 (i+1 )个相位组合, 其中, i的取值为 0~ (ΝχΜ-1 )。 In other words, set the column phase timer ProcPrdTimer = 0. The phase group that will be traversed this time It is recorded as the (i+1)th phase combination, where i is 0~(ΝχΜ-1).
604, 统计该相位组合下的性能。 604, statistics performance under the phase combination.
针对第 ( i+1 )个相位组合, 对 MIMO用户上报的单流 CQI进行求和、 计数, 分别记作 C^\¾m[i]和 (¾ Co er[i]。 For the (i+1)th phase combination, the single-stream CQI reported by the MIMO user is summed and counted, and recorded as C^\3⁄4m[i] and (3⁄4 Co er[i], respectively.
605, 判断该相位组合训练阶段是否期满。 605. Determine whether the phase combination training phase expires.
当 ProcPrdTimer = ProcPrd时, 第 ( i+1 )个相位组合训练阶段期满, 继 续步骤 606。 否则, 训练阶段尚未期满, 跳转到步骤 604。 这里, ProcPrd是 训练阶段的时长。 When ProcPrdTimer = ProcPrd, the (i+1)th phase combination training phase expires, and step 606 is continued. Otherwise, the training phase has not expired and jumps to step 604. Here, ProcPrd is the length of the training phase.
606, 对该相位组合下的性能进行预处理。 606, pre-processing the performance under the phase combination.
第 ( i+1 ) 个相位组合训练阶段期满时, 得到其性能结果 When the (i+1) phase combination training phase expires, the performance result is obtained.
CqiPer[i]= ] ,其中 CqiC醒 ter[i ≠ 0。若计数为 0,则当前的 <¾/^φ·]保 CqiPer[i]= ] , where CqiC wakes ter[i ≠ 0. If the count is 0, the current <3⁄4/^φ·]
CqiCounter[i] CqiCounter[i]
护为 0。 对训练得到的性能结果 <¾^φ·]进行预处理。 Protected to 0. The performance result (3⁄4^φ·] obtained by the training is preprocessed.
例如, 对该性能结果 <¾/^φ·]进行 Alpha滤波, 更新第 (i+1 )个相位组 合 的 生 能 结 果 , StaCqilock[i]=StaCqilock[i] x (\-alock)+CqiPer[i] x alock , StaCqiunlock[i]=StaCqiunlock[i] x i)--Oiunlock )+CqiPer[i] x unlock , 并将变量(¾ΊΜ[ ] 、 CqiCounter[i]和 < /^φ·]清零。 这里 StaCqi ck[i]即为上述锁定性能值, C^^ [i]即为上述失锁性能值。 其中, aunlock >alock , 用于快速跟踪 最优列相位的变化, 以触发锁定态到失锁态的迁移, 更快地搜集训练样本; alock用于精确选择锁定的最优相位, 并联合 aunlock来触发失锁态到锁定态的迁 移。 具体地, 锁定态到失锁态的迁移和失锁态到锁定态的迁移判断过程如前 文所述, 为避免重复, 在此不再赘述。 For example, Alpha filtering is performed on the performance result <3⁄4/^φ·], and the energy generation result of the (i+1)th phase combination is updated, StaCqilock[i]=StaCqilock[i] x (\-a lock )+CqiPer [i] xa lock , StaCqiunlock[i]=StaCqiunlock[i] xi)--Oi unlock )+CqiPer[i] x unlock , and clear the variables (3⁄4ΊΜ[ ] , CqiCounter[i] and < /^φ·] Zero. Here StaCqi ck[i] is the above locking performance value, C^^ [i] is the above-mentioned loss-of-lock performance value. Among them, a unlock > a lock is used to quickly track the optimal column phase change to trigger Locking state to unlocked state migration, collecting training samples faster; a lock is used to accurately select the optimal phase of the lock, and combined with a unlock to trigger the migration from the unlocked state to the locked state. Specifically, the locked state is lost. The migration state of the lock state and the transition process from the lock-up state to the lock state are as described above. To avoid repetition, details are not described herein.
607, 判断是否遍历了所有的相位组合。 607, determine whether all phase combinations are traversed.
如果已经遍历了所有的 ΝχΜ个相位组合, 则继续步骤 608, 否则, 跳 转到步骤 603。 例如, 当 i = NχM-l时, 确定已经遍历完所有的列相位。 当 i<NxM-l时, 确定尚未遍历完所有的列相位。 If all of the phase combinations have been traversed, then step 608 is continued, otherwise, the process proceeds to step 603. For example, when i = NχM-l, it is determined that all column phases have been traversed. When i < NxM-l, it is determined that all column phases have not been traversed.
608, 确定最优相位组合。 608, determining an optimal phase combination.
从前述得到的 ΝχΜ个 StoC^ZocWi]值中确定最大值, 将该最大值的索引 值对应的相位组合作为最优性能对应的相位组合, 称为最优相位组合。 假设 最大值为
, n的取值为 0~ (ΝχΜ-1 ), 则 η为索引值, 其对应的 第 (η+1 )个相位组合 d,U为最优相位组合。 The maximum value is determined from the above-mentioned StoC^ZocWi] values, and the phase combination corresponding to the index value of the maximum value is taken as the phase combination corresponding to the optimal performance, which is called the optimal phase combination. Assume the maximum is If the value of n is 0~(ΝχΜ-1), then η is the index value, and the corresponding (n+1)th phase combination d, U is the optimal phase combination.
609, 判决是否锁定该最优相位组合。
如果 Lockflag = 0, 根据设定的最优列相位锁定规则判决是否锁定最优 性能对应的最优列相位。 例如, 判断最优性能 StoC^ZocWn]是否不氐于 Mean(StaCqilock[i]) + ThreshA , 其中, Mi¾m0¾<2(¾ tod [ ])为前述得到的 N 个 StaCqilock[i]的平均值, ThreshA为预设的门限值。 判断 StoC^ w/ocWn]是否不氐 -f Mean(StaCqiunlock[i]) + ThreshB , 其中, Meim toG^ toc ])为前述得到的 N 个 StaCqiun ck[i]的平均值, ThreshB为预设的门限值。 609, decide whether to lock the optimal phase combination. If Lockflag = 0, it is determined according to the set optimal column phase locking rule whether to lock the optimal column phase corresponding to the optimal performance. For example, determine whether the optimal performance StoC^ZocWn] is not inconsistent with Mean(StaCqilock[i]) + ThreshA , where Mi3⁄4m03⁄4<2(3⁄4 tod [ ]) is the average of the N StaCqilock[i] obtained in the foregoing, ThreshA Is the preset threshold. Determine whether StoC^ w/ocWn] is not 氐-f Mean(StaCqiunlock[i]) + ThreshB , where Meim toG^ toc ]) is the average of the N StaCqiun ck[i] obtained above, and ThreshB is preset. Threshold.
具体地, 如果 StoC ZocWn p aC wZocWn]均不氐于对应的 (平均值+门 限值), 则将锁定标志置为 1 , 即 Lockflag = 1 , 并将相位组合设定为索引值 n对应的相位组合 d,U , 即最优相位组合。 否则, 锁定标志不变, 仍设 置为 0, 即 Lockflag = 0, 并跳转到步骤 603。 Specifically, if StoC ZocWn p aC wZocWn] is not corresponding to the corresponding (average value + threshold value), the lock flag is set to 1, that is, Lockflag = 1 , and the phase combination is set to the index value n corresponding to The phase combination d, U is the optimal phase combination. Otherwise, the lock flag is unchanged, is still set to 0, that is, Lockflag = 0, and jumps to step 603.
如果 Lockflag = 1 , 根据设定的最优相位锁定规则判决是否需要跳出锁 定 态 。 例 如 , 比 较 最 优 性 能 StaCqiunlock[n] 是 否 不 低 于 Mean(StaCqiunlock[i]) + ThreshC , 其中, Meim toG^ /ocfc[''])为前述得到的 N个 StaCqiunlock[i]的平均值, ThreshC为预设的门限值。 If Lockflag = 1 , it is determined according to the set optimal phase lock rule whether it needs to jump out of the lock state. For example, whether the optimal performance StaCqiunlock[n] is not lower than Mean(StaCqiunlock[i]) + ThreshC , where Meim toG^ /ocfc['']) is the average value of the N StaCqiunlock[i] obtained in the foregoing, ThreshC is the preset threshold.
具体地, 如果最优性能 C^^tocWn]低于(平均值 +门限值), 则将锁定 标志置为 0,即 Lockflag = 0,并跳转到步骤 603。如果最优性能 StoC^ Ζ0( [η] 不低于(平均值 +门限值), 根据设定的最优相位组合锁定规则判决是否锁定 在最优性能 StoC^^tocWn]对应的新的相位组合。 上述最优列相位锁定规则可 以是: 例如, 比较该新的相位组合的性能和上一个工作阶段使用的最优相位 组合的性能, 当比较所得的差异大于预设的门限值时才进行最优相位组合更 新, 否则, 不更新最优相位组合。 应理解, 任何为了性能考虑, 在最优相位 组合更新阶段进行的相位连续性处理也在落在本发明实施例的保护范围内。 Specifically, if the optimal performance C^^tocWn] is lower than (average value + threshold value), the lock flag is set to 0, that is, Lockflag = 0, and the process proceeds to step 603. If the optimal performance StoC^ Ζ 0( [η] is not lower than (average + threshold), decide whether to lock the new one corresponding to the optimal performance StoC^^tocWn] according to the set optimal phase combination locking rule. Phase combination The above optimal column phase locking rule can be: for example, comparing the performance of the new phase combination with the performance of the optimal phase combination used in the previous working phase, when the comparison difference is greater than a preset threshold The optimal phase combination update is performed, otherwise, the optimal phase combination is not updated. It should be understood that any phase continuity processing performed in the optimal phase combination update phase for performance considerations also falls within the scope of protection of the embodiments of the present invention. .
610, 进入工作阶段。 610, enter the work phase.
如果 Lockflag = 1 , 相位组合训练结束, 启动工作阶段定时器 WorkPrdTimer„ If Lockflag = 1 , phase combination training ends, start the work phase timer WorkPrdTimer
611 , 固定最优相位组合。 611, fixed optimal phase combination.
固定前述确定的 H,U为新的最优相位组合。 The previously determined H, U is fixed as the new optimal phase combination.
612, 判断工作阶段是否期满。 612, determine whether the work phase expires.
当工作阶段期满, 即 WorkPrdTimer = WorkPrd时, 准备跳出固定相位组 合, 进入到训练阶段流程, 即跳转到步骤 601。 否则, 继续步骤 611。 这里, WorkPrd是工作阶段的时长。 应理解, 由于最优相位组合和初始设置的首个
相位组合可能不同, 任何为了性能考虑, 在从工作阶段的固定相位组合向训 练阶段跳转时进行的相位组合连续性处理也落在本发明是实施例的保护范 围内。 When the working phase expires, that is, WorkPrdTimer = WorkPrd, it is ready to jump out of the fixed phase combination and enter the training phase process, that is, jump to step 601. Otherwise, proceed to step 611. Here, WorkPrd is the length of the work phase. It should be understood that due to the optimal phase combination and the initial setting of the initial The phase combination may be different, and any phase combination continuity processing performed when shifting from the fixed phase combination of the working phase to the training phase for performance considerations also falls within the scope of protection of the present invention.
图 7 是本发明另一实施例的进行最优相位组合选择的方法的示意流程 图。 例如, 图 7的方法可以应用于图 5所示的 VAM架构。 Figure 7 is a schematic flow diagram of a method of performing optimal phase combination selection in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention. For example, the method of Figure 7 can be applied to the VAM architecture shown in Figure 5.
701 , 初始化阶段。 701, initialization phase.
在初始化阶段中,进行如下设置:将列相位的锁定标志的初值置为 0 (即 LockflagCol = 0 ), 列相位 。,为 0, 相关变量清零。 In the initialization phase, set the initial value of the lock flag of the column phase to 0 (ie LockflagCol = 0), column phase. , 0, the relevant variable is cleared.
702, 确定进入训练阶段。 702, determined to enter the training phase.
例如, 在确定为失锁态时, 确定进入训练模式。 或者, 在确定为锁定态, 且工作阶段期满时, 确定进入训练模式。 然后, 根据预设的 N个列相位进行 遍历。 For example, when it is determined to be in a lost lock state, it is determined to enter the training mode. Or, when it is determined to be in a locked state, and the working phase expires, it is determined to enter the training mode. Then, traverse according to the preset N column phases.
703 , 列相位计时器归零。 703, the column phase timer is reset to zero.
换句话说, 设定列相位计时器 ProcPrdTimerCol = 0。 将本次遍历的列相 位记为第 (i+1 )个列相位, 其中, i的取值为 0~ ( N-1 )。 In other words, set the column phase timer ProcPrdTimerCol = 0. The phase of the traversed column is recorded as the (i+1)th column phase, where i is 0 to (N-1).
704, 统计该列相位下的性能。 704, statistics performance under the phase of the column.
针对第 (i+1 )个列相位, 对 MIMO用户上报的单流 CQI进行求和、 计 数, 分别记作 C \¾m0 i]和 CqiCo諷 terCol[i]。 For the (i+1)th column phase, the single-flow CQI reported by the MIMO user is summed and counted, respectively, as C \3⁄4m0 i] and CqiCo satir terCol[i].
705 , 判断该列相位训练阶段是否期满。 705. Determine whether the phase training phase of the column expires.
当 ProcPrdTimerCol = ProcPrdl时, 第 ( i+1 )个列相位训练阶段期满, 继续步骤 706。 否则, 训练阶段尚未期满, 跳转到步骤 704。 这里, ProcPrdl 是列相位训练阶段的时长。 When ProcPrdTimerCol = ProcPrdl, the (i+1)th column phase training phase expires, and step 706 is continued. Otherwise, the training phase has not expired and jumps to step 704. Here, ProcPrdl is the duration of the column phase training phase.
706, 对该列相位下的性能进行预处理。 706, pre-processing the performance of the column phase.
第 ( i+1 ) 个列相位训练阶段期满时, 得到其性能结果 CqiPerCol[i]= C(liSumCo1^ , 其中 C^O^ erO^i]≠ 0。 若计数为 0 , 则当前的 When the (i+1)th phase training phase expires, the performance result CqiPerCol[i]= C( l iSumCo1 ^ , where C^O^ erO^i]≠ 0 is obtained. If the count is 0, the current
CqiCounterCol[i] CqiCounterCol[i]
<¾ /^α ·]保护为 0。 对训练得到的性能结果 C^PerO^ ]进行预处理。 <3⁄4 /^α ·] protection is 0. The performance result obtained by the training is C^PerO^].
例如, 对该性能结果 C^PerO^]进行 Alpha滤波, 更新第 (i+1 )个列相 位的 '] "生能结果, StaCqilockCol[i]=StaCqilockCol[i] x ( 1 -alockcol )+CqiPerCol[i] x alockcol , StaCqiunlockCol[i]=StaCqiunlockCol[i] x (\-aunlockcol)+CqiPerCol[i] x Oiunlockcol , 并 夺变量 CqiSumCol[i]、 CqiCounterCol[i]和 CqiPerCol[i]清零。 这里 StaCqilockCol[i]即为上述 锁定性能值, ^Zo O^i]即为上述失锁性能值。 其中, c unlockcol > c lockcol ,
用于快速跟踪最优列相位的变化, 以触发锁定态到失锁态的迁移, 更 快地搜集训练样本; 《^。,用于精确选择锁定的最优相位, 并联合^。^来触 发失锁态到锁定态的迁移。 具体地, 锁定态到失锁态的迁移和失锁态到锁定 态的迁移判断过程如前文所述, 为避免重复, 在此不再赘述。 For example, Alpha filtering is performed on the performance result C^PerO^], and the 'i' energy result of the (i+1)th column phase is updated, StaCqilockCol[i]=StaCqilockCol[i] x (1 -a lockcol )+ CqiPerCol[i] xa lockcol , StaCqiunlockCol[i]=StaCqiunlockCol[i] x (\-a unlockcol )+CqiPerCol[i] x Oi unlockcol , and take the variables CqiSumCol[i], CqiCounterCol[i] and CqiPerCol[i] Zero. Here, StaCqilockCol[i] is the above lock performance value, ^Zo O^i] is the above lock loss performance value, where c unlockcol > c lockcol , It is used to quickly track the change of the optimal column phase to trigger the migration from the locked state to the unlocked state, and collect the training samples faster; , used to precisely select the optimal phase of the lock, and join ^. ^ to trigger the migration of the lock-up state to the lock state. Specifically, the transition process from the lock state to the lock-up state and the transition state of the lock-up state to the lock state are as described above. To avoid repetition, details are not described herein again.
707, 判断是否遍历了所有的列相位。 707, determine whether to traverse all the column phases.
如果已经遍历了所有的 N个列相位, 则继续步骤 708, 否则, 跳转到步 骤 703。 例如, 当 i = N-l时, 确定已经遍历完所有的列相位。 当 i < N-l时, 确定尚未遍历完所有的列相位。 If all of the N column phases have been traversed, then step 708 is continued, otherwise, a jump to step 703. For example, when i = N-l, it is determined that all column phases have been traversed. When i < N-l, it is determined that all column phases have not been traversed.
708, 确定最优列相位。 708, determining an optimal column phase.
从前述得到的 N个 ^^^/^^^ 值中确定最大值,将该最大值的索引值 对应的列相位作为最优性能对应的列相位, 称为最优列相位。 4艮设最大值为 StaCqilockCol[n] , n的取值为 0~ ( N-1 ), 则 n为索引值, 其对应的第 ( n+1 ) 个列相位为最优列相位 θ ι。 The maximum value is determined from the N ^^^^^^ values obtained as described above, and the column phase corresponding to the index value of the maximum value is taken as the column phase corresponding to the optimal performance, which is called the optimal column phase. 4, the maximum value is StaCqilockCol[n], and the value of n is 0~(N-1), then n is an index value, and the corresponding (n+1)th column phase is the optimal column phase θ ι .
709, 判决是否锁定该最优列相位。 709, determining whether to lock the optimal column phase.
如果 LockflagCol = 0, 根据设定的最优列相位锁定规则判决是否锁定最 优性能对应的最优列相位。 例如, 判断最优性能 S C≠ockCol\n]是否不低于 Mean(StaCqilockCol[i]) + ThreshA,其中, Meim toC^todO^ ])为前述得到的 N个 StaCqilockCol[i]的平均值, ThreshA为预设的门限值。判断 StaCqiunlockCol[n]是否 不低于 Mean(StaCqiunlockCol[i]) + ThreshB , 其中, Mean StaCqiunlockCol[i])为前述 得到的 N个 StaCqiunlockCol[i]的平均值, ThreshB为预设的门限值。 If LockflagCol = 0, it is determined according to the set optimal column phase locking rule whether to lock the optimal column phase corresponding to the optimal performance. For example, determine whether the optimal performance SC≠ockCol\n] is not lower than Mean(StaCqilockCol[i]) + ThreshA, where Meim toC^todO^ ]) is the average of the N StaCqilockCol[i] obtained in the foregoing, ThreshA Is the preset threshold. It is judged whether StaCqiunlockCol[n] is not lower than Mean(StaCqiunlockCol[i]) + ThreshB , wherein Mean StaCqiunlockCol[i]) is the average value of N StaCqiunlockCol[i] obtained in the foregoing, and ThreshB is a preset threshold value.
具体地, 如果 StaCqilockCol[n]和 StaCqiunlockCol[n\均不^ ί氐于对应的 (平均 值 +门限值), 则将锁定标志置为 1 , 即 Lockflag = l , 并将列相位 U殳定为 索引值 n对应的列相位值, 即最优列相位。 否则, 锁定标志不变, 仍设置为 0, 即 LockflagCol = 0, 并跳转到步骤 703。 Specifically, if both StaCqilockCol[n] and StaCqiunlockCol[n\ are not corresponding to (average + threshold), the lock flag is set to 1, that is, Lockflag = l, and the column phase U is set. The column phase value corresponding to the index value n, that is, the optimal column phase. Otherwise, the lock flag is unchanged, still set to 0, that is, LockflagCol = 0, and jumps to step 703.
如果 LockflagCol = 1 , 根据设定的最优相位锁定规则判决是否需要跳出 锁 定态 。 例 如 , 比较最优性 能 StaCqiunlockCol[n] 是否 不低于 Mean(StaCqiunlockCol[i]) + ThreshC , 其中, Mean(StaCqiun ckCc [i])为前述得到的 N个 StaCqiwilockColii]的平均值, ThreshC为预设的门限值。 If LockflagCol = 1, it is determined according to the set optimal phase locking rule whether it needs to jump out of the lock state. For example, whether the optimal performance StaCqiunlockCol[n] is not lower than Mean(StaCqiunlockCol[i]) + ThreshC , where Mean(StaCqiun ckCc [i]) is the average of the aforementioned N StaCqiwilockColii], ThreshC is the default Threshold.
具体地, 如果最优性能 C^^tocWn]低于(平均值 +门限值), 则将锁定 标志置为 0 , 即 LockflagCol = 0 , 并跳转到步骤 703。 如果最优性能 StoC^^ZocWn]不低于(平均值 +门限值), 根据设定的最优列相位锁定规则判
决是否锁定在性能最优对应的新的列相位。 应理解, 任何为了性能考虑, 在 最优列相位更新阶段进行的相位连续性处理也在落在本发明实施例的保护 范围内。 Specifically, if the optimal performance C^^tocWn] is lower than (average value + threshold value), the lock flag is set to 0, that is, LockflagCol = 0, and the process proceeds to step 703. If the optimal performance StoC^^ZocWn] is not lower than (average + threshold), it is judged according to the set optimal column phase locking rule. Whether to lock the new column phase in the optimal performance. It should be understood that any phase continuity processing performed during the optimal column phase update phase for performance considerations also falls within the scope of protection of embodiments of the present invention.
710, 行相位计时器归零。 710, the line phase timer is reset to zero.
如果 LockflagCol = 1,并锁定了最优列相位, 根据预设的 M个行相位进 行行相位遍历。 设定行相位计时器 ProcPrdTimerRow = 0。 将本次遍历的行 相位记为第 (j+1 )个行相位, 其中, j的取值为 0~ ( M-1 )。 If LockflagCol = 1, and the optimal column phase is locked, the line phase traversal is performed according to the preset M line phases. Set the line phase timer ProcPrdTimerRow = 0. The phase of the traversed line is recorded as the (j+1)th line phase, where j is 0~(M-1).
711 , 统计该行相位下的性能。 711, statistics performance under the phase of the line.
针对第 (j+1 )个行相位, 对 MIMO用户上 的单流 CQI进行求和、 计 数, 分别 己作 CqiSumRoM j]和 CqiCounterRoM^]。 For the (j+1)th line phase, the single-flow CQIs on the MIMO user are summed and counted, respectively, as CqiSumRoM j] and CqiCounterRoM^].
712, 判断该行相位训练阶段是否期满。 712. Determine whether the phase training phase of the line expires.
当 ProcPrdTimerRow = ProcPrd2时, 第 ( j+1 )个行相位训练阶段期满, 继续步骤 713。 否则, 训练阶段尚未期满, 跳转到步骤 711。 这里, ProcPrd2 是行相位训练阶段的时长。 When ProcPrdTimerRow = ProcPrd2, the (j+1)th line phase training phase expires, and step 713 is continued. Otherwise, the training phase has not expired and jump to step 711. Here, ProcPrd2 is the duration of the phase phase training phase.
713 , 对该行相位下的性能进行预处理。 713, preprocessing the performance of the line phase.
第 ( j+1 ) 个行相位训练阶段期满时, 得到其性能结果 When the (j+1)th phase phase training phase expires, the performance result is obtained.
CqiPerRow[j]= C^iSumRo^ , 其中 (¾ Cb ^ R^Lj]≠ 0。 若计数为 0, 则当前 CqiPerRow[j]= C ^ iSumRo ^ , where ( 3⁄4 Cb ^ R^Lj]≠ 0. If the count is 0, then the current
CqiCounterRow\j ] CqiCounterRow\j ]
的 CqiPerRow[j]保护为 0。 对训练得到的性能结果 C^ erRowU]进行预处理。 The CqiPerRow[j] is protected as 0. The performance result obtained by the training is C^ erRowU].
例如, 对该性能结果 C^Per towU]进行 Alpha滤波, 更新第 (j+1 )个行 相 位 的 性 能 结 果 , For example, performing Alpha filtering on the performance result C^Per towU], updating the performance result of the (j+1)th row phase,
StaCqilockRow\j]=StaCqilockRow\j ] x ( - lockrow )+CqiPerRow\j] x alock StaCqilockRow\j]=StaCqilockRow\j ] x ( - lockrow )+CqiPerRow\j] xa lock
S taCqiunlockRow\j]=S taCqiunlockRow\j ] x ( 1 - aunlockrow )+CqiPerRow\j ] x aunlockrow , 并将更量 CqiSumRow[j] 、 CqiCounterRow{j]和 CqiPerRoH{j]清零。 其中, ο^η1οΑ > alockrow ,S taCqiunlockRow\j]=S taCqiunlockRow\j ] x ( 1 - a unlockrow )+CqiPerRow\j ] xa unlockrow , and clear the more CqiSumRow[j] , CqiCounterRow{j] and CqiPerRoH{j]. Where ο^ η1οΑ > a lockrow ,
«』 用于快速跟踪最优列相位的变化, 以触发锁定态到失锁态的迁移, 更 快地搜集训练样本; 用于精确选择锁定的最优相位, 并联合^。^来触 发失锁态到锁定态的迁移。 具体地, 锁定态到失锁态的迁移和失锁态到锁定 态的迁移判断过程如前文所述, 为避免重复, 在此不再赘述。 «』 is used to quickly track the change of the optimal column phase to trigger the migration from the locked state to the unlocked state, to collect the training samples more quickly; to select the optimal phase of the lock accurately, and to combine ^. ^ to trigger the migration of the lock-up state to the lock state. Specifically, the transition process from the lock state to the lock-up state and the transition state of the lock-up state to the lock state are as described above. To avoid repetition, details are not described herein.
714, 判断是否遍历了所有的行相位。 714, determine whether all the line phases are traversed.
如果已经遍历了所有的 Μ个行相位, 则继续步骤 715 , 否则, 跳转到步 骤 710。 例如, 当 j = M-l时, 确定已经遍历完所有的列相位。 当 i < M-l时, 确定尚未遍历完所有的列相位。
715 , 确定最优行相位。 If all of the line phases have been traversed, then step 715 is continued, otherwise, a jump to step 710. For example, when j = Ml, it is determined that all column phases have been traversed. When i < Ml, it is determined that all column phases have not been traversed. 715, determining an optimal line phase.
从前述得到的 M个 StoC^Zi^Riwlj]值中确定最大值, 将该最大值的索引 值对应的行相位作为最优性能对应的行相位, 称为最优行相位。 假设最大值 为 StaCqilockRow[m] , m的取值为 0~( M-1 ),则 m为索引值,其对应的第( m+1 ) 个行相位为最优行相位 Θ The maximum value is determined from the values of the M StoC^Zi^Riwlj] obtained, and the row phase corresponding to the index value of the maximum value is taken as the row phase corresponding to the optimal performance, which is called the optimal row phase. Assuming that the maximum value is StaCqilockRow[m] and the value of m is 0~( M-1 ), m is the index value, and the corresponding ( m+1 ) line phase is the optimal line phase.
716, 进入工作阶段。 716, enter the work phase.
如果 LockflagCol = 1 , 且行相位训练结束, 启动工作阶段定时器 WorkPrdTimer„ If LockflagCol = 1 and the line phase training is over, start the work phase timer WorkPrdTimer
717, 固定最优列相位。 717, fixed optimal column phase.
固定前述确定的 n,u为新的最优相位组合。 The previously determined n, u is fixed as the new optimal phase combination.
718, 判断工作阶段是否期满。 718, to determine whether the work phase expires.
当工作阶段期满, 即 WorkPrdTimer = WorkPrd时, 准备跳出固定相位组 合, 进入到训练阶段流程, 即跳转到步骤 701。 否则, 继续步骤 717。 这里, WorkPrd是工作阶段的时长。 应理解, 由于最优相位组合和初始设置的首个 相位组合可能不同, 任何为了性能考虑, 在从工作阶段的固定相位组合向训 练阶段跳转时进行的相位组合连续性处理也落在本发明是实施例的保护范 围内。 When the working phase expires, that is, WorkPrdTimer = WorkPrd, it is ready to jump out of the fixed phase combination and enter the training phase process, that is, jump to step 701. Otherwise, proceed to step 717. Here, WorkPrd is the length of the work phase. It should be understood that since the optimal phase combination and the initial phase combination of the initial settings may be different, any phase combination continuity processing performed when shifting from the fixed phase combination of the working phase to the training phase for performance considerations also falls within the present invention. It is within the scope of protection of the embodiment.
应理解, 在确定最优相位组合时, 先进行相位遍历再进行列相位遍历的 原理与上述方法类似, 因此也落在本发明实施例的保护范围内。 It should be understood that, in determining the optimal phase combination, the principle of performing phase traversal and performing column phase traversal is similar to the above method, and therefore falls within the protection scope of the embodiment of the present invention.
另外, 行相位遍历和列相位遍历的过程不必严格遵循先后的顺序, 也可 以部分或全部同步地进行。 例如, 在锁定态, 列训练阶段和行训练阶段并不 连续, 而是间隔交错, 即 709完成后, 先进入列相位的工作阶段, 在列相位 的工作阶段的中间再开始 710的行训练。 相应地, 701列训练也可以在行相 位的工作阶段的中间开始。 列和行各自独立判决最优相位。 这样的修改也落 在本发明实施例的范围内。 In addition, the process of row phase traversal and column phase traversal does not have to be strictly followed by sequential order, and may be performed partially or completely synchronously. For example, in the locked state, the column training phase and the row training phase are not continuous, but are interleaved. That is, after the completion of 709, the column phase is first entered into the working phase of the column phase, and the row training of 710 is started in the middle of the column phase working phase. Accordingly, the 701 train can also begin in the middle of the work phase of the line phase. Columns and rows independently determine the optimal phase. Such modifications are also within the scope of embodiments of the invention.
而且, 本发明实施例对行相位训练的具体方式不做限制, 可以按照图 7 的方式训练最优行相位, 也可以按照其他方式训练最优行相位。 Moreover, the embodiment of the present invention does not limit the specific manner of the line phase training, and the optimal line phase can be trained according to the manner of FIG. 7, or the optimal line phase can be trained according to other methods.
图 8是本发明一个实施例的 MIMO信号处理装置的框图。 图 3的信号 处理装置 80包括第一旋转单元 810和第一矩阵单元 820。 Figure 8 is a block diagram of a MIMO signal processing apparatus in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention. The signal processing device 80 of FIG. 3 includes a first rotation unit 810 and a first matrix unit 820.
第一旋转单元 810,用于对 n个虚拟天线信号中的 m个虚拟天线信号进 行相应的列相位旋转, 得到 m 个第一旋转信号, 其中虚拟天线信号是将
MIMO信号乘以预编码矩阵得到的, n、 m为整数, 且 l≤m≤n。 a first rotation unit 810, configured to perform corresponding column phase rotation on the m virtual antenna signals of the n virtual antenna signals, to obtain m first rotation signals, where the virtual antenna signals are The MIMO signal is obtained by multiplying the precoding matrix, where n and m are integers, and l ≤ m ≤ n.
第一矩阵单元 820, 用于将未进行列相位旋转的 n-m个虚拟天线信号以 及 m个第一旋转信号与 nxn的 VAM矩阵相乘, 得到 n个输出信号, n个输 出信号用于得到 n个物理天线信号。 The first matrix unit 820 is configured to multiply the nm virtual antenna signals that are not subjected to the column phase rotation and the m first rotation signals by the VAM matrix of the nxn to obtain n output signals, and the n output signals are used to obtain n Physical antenna signal.
本发明实施例在将虚拟天线信号乘以 VAM矩阵之前, 对进行了 PCI加 权的全部或部分虚拟天线信号进行列相位旋转,这种 PCI加权和列相位旋转 的级联方式等价于扩展了 PCI码本个数,从而能够修正受限码本带来的量化 精度问题, 提高 MIMO性能。 In the embodiment of the present invention, before the virtual antenna signal is multiplied by the VAM matrix, the column phase rotation is performed on all or part of the virtual antenna signals subjected to PCI weighting, and the cascading manner of the PCI weighting and the column phase rotation is equivalent to expanding the PCI. The number of codebooks can correct the quantization accuracy problem caused by the restricted codebook and improve the MIMO performance.
可选地,作为一个实施例,第一旋转单元 810具体用于将 m个虚拟天线 信号与 ^相乘, 其中, θ。为与 m个虚拟天线信号相应的列相位, c为虚拟 天线信号的序号, c E [l,m]。 Optionally, as an embodiment, the first rotating unit 810 is specifically configured to multiply m virtual antenna signals by ^, where θ. For the column phase corresponding to the m virtual antenna signals, c is the sequence number of the virtual antenna signal, c E [l, m ].
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 信号处理装置 80还包括第一确定单元 830, 用于确定 ee的选择状态, 并根据 ec的选择状态确定 ee的选择阶段。 ee的选 择状态包括锁定态和失锁态。第一确定单元具体用于当确定 ec的选择状态为 失锁态时, 确定 ee的选择阶段为训练阶段; 或者当确定 Θ^々选择状态为锁 定态时, 确定 ec的选择阶段为交替的训练阶段和工作阶段。 在此情况下, 在 对 η个虚拟天线信号中的 m个虚拟天线信号进行相应的列相位旋转时,可根 据 θ。的选择阶段, 进行列相位旋转。 Optionally, as another embodiment, the signal processing device 80 further includes a first determining unit 830, configured to determine a selection state of e e , and determine a selection phase of e e according to the selection state of e c . The selection states of e e include a locked state and an unlocked state. The first determining unit is specifically configured to: when determining that the selected state of the e c is the unlocked state, determine that the selection phase of e e is the training phase; or when determining that the selected state is the locked state, determining that the selection phase of the e c is Alternate training and work phases. In this case, when the corresponding column phase rotation is performed on the m virtual antenna signals in the n virtual antenna signals, θ may be used. In the selection phase, the column phase rotation is performed.
可选地,作为另一实施例,第一旋转单元 810具体用于,在训练阶段中, 周期性地更新 Θ^々取值, 并按照更新后的 ee进行列相位旋转。 在工作阶段 中的至少部分时间内, 使用固定的 ec进行列相位旋转。 Optionally, as another embodiment, the first rotating unit 810 is specifically configured to periodically update the value in the training phase, and perform column phase rotation according to the updated e e . The column phase rotation is performed using a fixed e c for at least part of the working phase.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 信号处理装置 80还包括第一获取单元 840 和第二确定单元 850。 第一获取单元 840用于在训练阶段中, 获取每个更新 后的 θ。下 MIMO用户设备对应上报的单流信道质量指示 CQI,并根据 MIMO 用户设备对应上报的单流 CQI获取最优列相位。 第二确定单元 850, 用于当 训练阶段期满时, 根据最优列相位确定是否进行选择状态的迁移。 Optionally, as another embodiment, the signal processing device 80 further includes a first obtaining unit 840 and a second determining unit 850. The first acquisition unit 840 is configured to acquire each updated θ in the training phase. The MIMO user equipment corresponds to the reported single stream channel quality indication CQI, and obtains the optimal column phase according to the single stream CQI reported by the MIMO user equipment. The second determining unit 850 is configured to determine whether to perform the migration of the selected state according to the optimal column phase when the training phase expires.
可选地,作为另一实施例, 第一获取单元 840具体用于对当前 0C下获取 的单流 CQI进行求和得到第一总和值, 对当前 θε下获取的单流 CQI进行计 数得到第一计数值;根据第一总和值和第一计数值得到当前 的锁定性能值 和失锁性能值; 在遍历所有 θ。之后, 将所有 θ。中锁定性能值最大的 θ。确定 为最优列相位。
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 第一获取单元 840具体用于将第一总和值除 以第一计数值得到第一平均值; 对第一平均值进行预处理得到锁定性能值和 失锁性能值。 可选地, 当第一计数值为 0时, 可以将第一平均值设为 0。 Optionally, as another embodiment, the first obtaining unit 840 is specifically configured to obtain a first sum value obtained by summing the single stream CQI acquired under the current 0 C , and count the single stream CQI obtained under the current θ ε . a first count value; obtaining a current lock performance value and a lock-loss performance value according to the first sum value and the first count value; traversing all θ. After that, all θ will be. The θ with the highest performance value is locked. Determined to be the optimal column phase. Optionally, as another embodiment, the first obtaining unit 840 is specifically configured to divide the first sum value by the first count value to obtain a first average value; pre-processing the first average value to obtain a lock performance value and loss of lock Performance value. Alternatively, when the first count value is 0, the first average value may be set to zero.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 如果当前的选择状态为失锁态: Optionally, as another embodiment, if the current selection state is an unlocked state:
第二确定单元 850 具体用于当最优列相位的锁定性能值不低于所有 的锁定性能值的平均值与第一阈值之和并且最优列相位的失锁性能值不低 于所有 的失锁性能值的平均值与第二阈值之和时,确定选择状态从失锁态 迁移至锁定态;当最优列相位的锁定性能值低于所有 的锁定性能值的平均 值与第一阈值之和或者最优列相位的失锁性能值低于所有 的失锁性能值 的平均值与第二阈值之和时, 确定选择状态不迁移。 The second determining unit 850 is specifically configured to: when the locking performance value of the optimal column phase is not lower than the sum of the average value of all the locking performance values and the first threshold, and the unlocking performance value of the optimal column phase is not lower than all the losses. When the average of the lock performance value is equal to the second threshold, determining that the selected state transitions from the unlocked state to the locked state; when the locking performance value of the optimal column phase is lower than the average of all the locking performance values and the first threshold And when the loss-lock performance value of the optimal column phase is lower than the sum of the average value of all the lock-loss performance values and the second threshold, it is determined that the selected state does not migrate.
或者, 如果当前的选择状态为锁定态: Or, if the current selection state is locked:
第二确定单元 850具体用于当最优列相位的失锁性能值低于所有 的失 锁性能值的平均值与第三阈值之和时, 确定选择状态从锁定态迁移至失锁 态;当最优列相位的失锁性能值不低于所有 的失锁性能值的平均值与第三 阈值之和时, 确定选择状态不迁移, 根据最优列相位确定下一工作阶段中使 用的固定的 θ^々取值。 The second determining unit 850 is specifically configured to determine that the selected state transitions from the locked state to the unlocked state when the unlocking performance value of the optimal column phase is lower than the sum of the average value of all the lost lock performance values and the third threshold; When the optimal column phase loss-locking performance value is not lower than the sum of the average value of all the lock-loss performance values and the third threshold, it is determined that the selected state does not migrate, and the fixed phase used in the next working phase is determined according to the optimal column phase. θ^々Value.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 第二确定单元 850具体用于当最优列相位和 上一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec之间的差异大于第四阈值时,将最优列相位 作为下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec; 否则将上一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec作为下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec。 Optionally, as another embodiment, the second determining unit 850 is specifically configured to: when the difference between the optimal column phase and the fixed e c used in the previous working phase is greater than the fourth threshold, the optimal column phase e c as a fixed next phase used; otherwise the sessions using a fixed e c e c a constant used in the next phase.
可选地,作为另一实施例,信号处理装置 80还包括,第二旋转单元 860, 用于将 n个输出信号中的 k个输出信号进行相应的行相位旋转,得到 k个第 二旋转信号, 其中 k为正整数; 其中未进行行相位旋转的 n-k个输出信号和 k个第二旋转信号作为 n个物理天线信号。 Optionally, as another embodiment, the signal processing device 80 further includes a second rotating unit 860, configured to perform k-th rotation of the k output signals of the n output signals to obtain k second rotation signals. Where k is a positive integer; wherein nk output signals and k second rotation signals for which no phase rotation is performed are performed as n physical antenna signals.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 第二旋转单元 860具体用于将 k个输出信号 与 ^相乘, 其中, ^为与 k个输出信号相应的行相位, r为虚拟天线信号的 序号, r E [ l ,k]。 Optionally, as another embodiment, the second rotating unit 860 is specifically configured to multiply the k output signals by ^, where ^ is a line phase corresponding to the k output signals, and r is a sequence number of the virtual antenna signal, r E [ l , k].
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 信号处理装置 80还包括第三确定单元 870, 用于确定 组合的选择状态, 并根据 {θ 组合的选择状态确定 {θ ΘΓ} 组合的选择阶段。 组合的选择状态包括锁定态和失锁态。 第三确定单 元 870具体用于当确定 {0e, ΘΓ}组合的选择状态为失锁态时, 确定 {0e, ΘΓ}组合
的选择阶段为训练阶段; 当确定 组合的选择状态为锁定态时,确定 {0C, 组合的选择阶段为交替的训练阶段和工作阶段。 其中, 第一旋转单元 810 根据 组合的选择阶段进行列相位旋转, 并且第二旋转单元根据 {θ ΘΓ} 组合的选择阶段进行行相位旋转。 Optionally, as another embodiment, the signal processing device 80 further includes a third determining unit 870, configured to determine a combined selection state, and determine a selection phase of the {θ Θ Γ } combination according to the selected state of the {θ combination. The combined selection states include a locked state and an unlocked state. Third determining unit 870 particularly when it is determined {0 e, Θ Γ} state combinations selected for loss of lock state is determined {0 e, Θ Γ} composition The selection phase is the training phase; when it is determined that the combined selection state is the locked state, {0 C is determined, and the combined selection phase is the alternating training phase and the working phase. Wherein, the first rotation unit 810 performs column phase rotation according to the combined selection phase, and the second rotation unit performs line phase rotation according to the selection phase of the {θ Θ Γ } combination.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 第一旋转单元 810具体用于在训练阶段中, 周期性地更新 {θ。, 组合的取值, 并按照更新后的 {θ 组合进行列相位旋 转; 或者在工作阶段中的至少部分时间内, 使用固定的 {θ 组合进行列相 位旋转。 第二旋转单元 860具体用于在训练阶段中, 周期性地更新 组 合的取值, 并按照更新后的 组合进行行相位旋转; 或者在工作阶段中 的至少部分时间内, 使用固定的 {ec, ej组合进行行相位旋转。 Optionally, as another embodiment, the first rotating unit 810 is specifically configured to periodically update {θ in the training phase. , the combined value, and the column phase rotation according to the updated {θ combination; or the column phase rotation using a fixed {θ combination for at least part of the working phase. The second rotation unit 860 is specifically configured to periodically update the combined values in the training phase, and perform phase rotation according to the updated combination; or use a fixed {e c in at least part of the working phase , ej combines to perform phase rotation.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 信号处理装置 80还包括第二获取单元 880, 用于在训练阶段中,获取每个更新后的 {θ 组合下 MIMO用户设备对应上 报的单流信道质量指示 CQI, 并根据 MIMO用户设备对应上报的单流 CQI 获取最优 {θ 0r}组合。 此时, 第三确定单元 870, 用于当训练阶段期满时, 根据最优 {θ。, 组合确定是否进行选择状态的迁移。 Optionally, as another embodiment, the signal processing apparatus 80 further includes a second obtaining unit 880, configured to acquire, in the training phase, a single stream channel quality indicator corresponding to the MIMO user equipment corresponding to each updated {θ combination. The CQI, and obtains the optimal {θ 0 r } combination according to the single-flow CQI reported by the MIMO user equipment. At this time, the third determining unit 870 is configured to use the optimal {θ when the training phase expires. , the combination determines whether to perform the migration of the selected state.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 第二获取单元 880具体用于对当前 {ec, er}组 合下获取的单流 CQI进行求和得到第二总和值,对当前 {θ 组合下获取的 单流 CQI进行计数得到第二计数值;根据第二总和值和第二计数值得到当前 组合的锁定性能值和失锁性能值; 在遍历所有 { , θ J组合之后, 将所 有 {θ 组合中锁定性能值最大的 {θ^, 组合确定为最优 {θ 组合。 Optionally, as another embodiment, the second obtaining unit 880 is specifically configured to obtain a second sum value obtained by summing the single stream CQIs obtained under the current {e c , e r } combination, and obtain the current {θ combination The single-flow CQI is counted to obtain a second count value; the current combined lock performance value and the lock-loss performance value are obtained according to the second sum value and the second count value; after traversing all { , θ J combinations, all {θ combinations are combined The combination of {θ^ with the largest locking performance value is determined as the optimal {θ combination.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 第二获取单元 880具体用于将第二总和值除 以第二计数值得到第二平均值。 第二获取单元 880还可以对第二平均值进行 预处理得到锁定性能值和失锁性能值。 可选地, 当第二计数值为 0时, 可以 将第二平均值设为 0。 Optionally, as another embodiment, the second obtaining unit 880 is specifically configured to divide the second sum value by the second count value to obtain a second average value. The second obtaining unit 880 can also preprocess the second average to obtain a lock performance value and a lock loss performance value. Alternatively, when the second count value is 0, the second average value can be set to zero.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 如果当前的选择状态为失锁态: Optionally, as another embodiment, if the current selection state is an unlocked state:
第三确定单元 880具体用于当最优 { , 组合的锁定性能值不低于所有 The third determining unit 880 is specifically used when the optimal { , the combined locking performance value is not lower than all
{θ0, 组合的锁定性能值的平均值与第一阈值之和并且最优列相位的失锁 性能值不低于所有 { , 组合的失锁性能值的平均值与第二阈值之和时, 确 定选择状态从失锁态迁移至锁定态; 当最优 { , 组合的锁定性能值低于所 有 {θ 组合的锁定性能值的平均值与第一阈值之和或者最优 组合 的失锁性能值低于所有 { , er}组合的失锁性能值的平均值与第二阈值之和
时, 确定选择状态不迁移; {θ 0 , the sum of the average value of the combined locking performance value and the first threshold value and the loss of the optimal column phase performance value is not lower than all { , the sum of the average value of the combined loss-of-lock performance value and the second threshold , determining that the selected state transitions from the unlocked state to the locked state; when the optimal { , the combined locking performance value is lower than the sum of the average of the locking performance values of all the {θ combinations and the first threshold or the optimal combination of the lockout performance The value is lower than the sum of the average of the lockout performance values of all { , e r } combinations and the second threshold When it is determined, the selection state is not migrated;
或者, 如果当前的选择状态为锁定态: Or, if the current selection state is locked:
第三确定单元 880 具体用于当最优 { , 组合的失锁性能值低于所有 The third determining unit 880 is specifically used when the optimal { , combined loss of lock performance value is lower than all
{θ0, 组合的失锁性能值的平均值与第三阈值之和时, 确定选择状态从锁定 态迁移至失锁态; 当最优 { , 组合的失锁性能值不低于所有 { , 组合的 失锁性能值的平均值与第三阈值之和时,确定选择状态不迁移,根据最优 {ec, 组合确定下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 {ec, 组合的取值。 {θ 0 , when the sum of the combined loss-of-lock performance values and the third threshold is determined, the selection state is determined to migrate from the locked state to the unlocked state; when the optimal { , the combined loss-of-lock performance value is not lower than all { , When the sum of the combined loss-of-lock performance values and the third threshold is determined, it is determined that the selected state does not migrate, and according to the optimal {e c , the combination determines the fixed {e c , the combined value used in the next working phase.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 第三确定单元 880具体用于当最优 {ec, ej组 合和上一工作阶段中使用的固定的 {ec, 组合之间的差异大于第四阈值时, 将最优 {ec, 组合作为下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 {ec, 组合; 否则将上 一工作阶段中使用的固定的 {ec, 组合作为下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 {θο, er}组合。 Optionally, as another embodiment, the third determining unit 880 is specifically configured to: when the optimal {e c , ej combination and the fixed {e c used in the previous working phase, the difference between the combinations is greater than the fourth threshold. when the optimal {e c, used in combination as the next phase immobilized {e c, combinations thereof; otherwise the sessions using a fixed {e c, used in combination as the next phase of the A fixed combination of {θο, e r }.
本发明实施例还提供一种基站, 包括上述任意一种 MIMO信号处理装 置。 The embodiment of the invention further provides a base station, including any one of the above MIMO signal processing devices.
图 9是本发明另一实施例的 MIMO信号处理装置的框图。 Figure 9 is a block diagram of a MIMO signal processing apparatus according to another embodiment of the present invention.
图 9的装置 90可用于实现上述方法实施例中各步骤及方法。装置 90可 应用于各种通信系统中的基站。图 9的实施例中,装置 90包括发射电路 920、 接收电路 930、 MIMO信号处理器 940、 处理单元 950, 存储器 960及天线 910。处理单元 950控制装置 90的操作,并且可用于处理信号。处理单元 950 还可以称为 CPU ( Central Processing Unit, 中央处理单元)。存储器 960可以 包括只读存储器和随机存取存储器, 并向处理单元 950提供指令和数据。 存 储器 960的一部分还可以包括非易失行随机存取存储器(NVRAM )。发射电 路 920和接收电路 930可以耦合到天线 910。装置 90的各个组件通过总线系 统 970耦合在一起, 其中总线系统 970除包括数据总线之外, 还包括电源总 线、 控制总线和状态信号总线。 但是为了清楚说明起见, 在图中将各种总线 都标为总线系统 970。 The apparatus 90 of Figure 9 can be used to implement the various steps and methods of the above method embodiments. The device 90 can be applied to base stations in various communication systems. In the embodiment of FIG. 9, device 90 includes a transmit circuit 920, a receive circuit 930, a MIMO signal processor 940, a processing unit 950, a memory 960, and an antenna 910. Processing unit 950 controls the operation of device 90 and can be used to process signals. Processing unit 950 may also be referred to as a CPU (Central Processing Unit). Memory 960 can include read only memory and random access memory and provides instructions and data to processing unit 950. A portion of memory 960 may also include non-volatile line random access memory (NVRAM). Transmitting circuit 920 and receiving circuit 930 can be coupled to antenna 910. The various components of device 90 are coupled together by a bus system 970, which in addition to the data bus includes a power supply bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus. However, for clarity of description, various buses are labeled as bus system 970 in the figure.
MIMO信号处理器 940可能是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。 在实现过程中,上述方法的全部或部分步骤可以通过 MIMO信号处理器 940 中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。这些指令可以通过处理 单元 950 以配合实现及控制。 用于执行本发明实施例揭示的方法, 上述的 MIMO信号处理器 940可以是通用处理器、 数字信号处理器(DSP )、 专用
集成电路(ASIC )、 现成可编程门阵列 (FPGA )或者其他可编程逻辑器件、 分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、 分立硬件组件。 可以实现或者执行本发明实施 例中的公开的各方法、 步骤及逻辑框图。 通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该 处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。 结合本发明实施例所公开的方法的步 骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成, 或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块 组合执行完成。 软件模块可以位于随机存储器, 闪存、 只读存储器, 可编程 只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、 寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质 中。 该存储介质位于存储器 960, MIMO信号处理器 940读取存储器 960中 的信息, 结合其硬件完成上述方法的全部或部分步骤。 The MIMO signal processor 940 may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities. In the implementation process, all or part of the steps of the above method may be completed by the integrated logic circuit of the hardware in the MIMO signal processor 940 or the instruction in the form of software. These instructions can be implemented and controlled by processing unit 950. For performing the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention, the MIMO signal processor 940 may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), or a dedicated Integrated circuit (ASIC), off-the-shelf programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic device, discrete hardware component. The methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be implemented or executed. The general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor or any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be directly implemented as a hardware processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor. The software modules can be located in a conventional storage medium such as random access memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and the like. The storage medium is located in the memory 960, and the MIMO signal processor 940 reads the information in the memory 960 and combines its hardware to perform all or part of the steps of the above method.
具体地,发射电路 920可对 n个虚拟天线信号中的 m个虚拟天线信号进 行相应的列相位旋转, 得到 m 个第一旋转信号, 其中虚拟天线信号是将 MIMO信号乘以预编码矩阵得到的, n、 m为整数, 且 l≤m≤n; 将未进行列 相位旋转的 n-m个虚拟天线信号以及 m个第一旋转信号,与 nxn的 VAM矩 阵相乘, 得到 n个输出信号, n个输出信号用于得到 n个物理天线信号。 Specifically, the transmitting circuit 920 can perform corresponding column phase rotation on the m virtual antenna signals of the n virtual antenna signals to obtain m first rotating signals, where the virtual antenna signal is obtained by multiplying the MIMO signal by the precoding matrix. , n, m is an integer, and l ≤ m ≤ n; multiply the virtual antenna signals and the m first rotation signals that are not subjected to the phase rotation of the column, and multiply the VAM matrix of nxn to obtain n output signals, n The output signal is used to derive n physical antenna signals.
本发明实施例在将虚拟天线信号乘以 VAM矩阵之前, 对进行了 PCI加 权的全部或部分虚拟天线信号进行列相位旋转,这种 PCI加权和列相位旋转 的级联方式等价于扩展了 PCI码本个数,从而能够修正受限码本带来的量化 精度问题, 提高 MIMO性能。 In the embodiment of the present invention, before the virtual antenna signal is multiplied by the VAM matrix, the column phase rotation is performed on all or part of the virtual antenna signals subjected to PCI weighting, and the cascading manner of the PCI weighting and the column phase rotation is equivalent to expanding the PCI. The number of codebooks can correct the quantization accuracy problem caused by the restricted codebook and improve the MIMO performance.
可选地, 作为一个实施例, 发射电路 920可在对 n个虚拟天线信号中的 m个虚拟天线信号进行相应的列相位旋转时,将 m个虚拟天线信号与 e 相 乘, 其中, 0e为与 m个虚拟天线信号相应的列相位, c为虚拟天线信号的序 号, c E [l,m]。 Optionally, as an embodiment, the transmitting circuit 920 may multiply the m virtual antenna signals by e when performing corresponding column phase rotation on the m virtual antenna signals of the n virtual antenna signals, where 0 e For the column phase corresponding to the m virtual antenna signals, c is the sequence number of the virtual antenna signal, c E [l, m].
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 存储器 960可存储使得 MIMO信号处理器 940或处理单元 950执行以下过程的指令: Alternatively, as another embodiment, the memory 960 can store instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
在对 n个虚拟天线信号中的 m个虚拟天线信号进行相应的列相位旋转之 前, 确定 的选择状态, 根据 的选择状态确定 的选择阶段。 的选择 状态包括锁定态和失锁态, 在根据 θ^々选择状态确定 θ^々选择阶段时, 当 确定 ee的选择状态为失锁态时, 确定 ee的选择阶段为训练阶段; 当确定 ec 的选择状态为锁定态时, 确定 θε的选择阶段为交替的训练阶段和工作阶段。 在此情况下,对 η个虚拟天线信号中的 m个虚拟天线信号进行相应的列相位 旋转时, 可根据 θ。的选择阶段, 进行列相位旋转。
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 存储器 960还存储使得 MIMO信号处理器 940或处理单元 950执行以下过程的指令: Before the corresponding column phase rotation is performed on the m virtual antenna signals of the n virtual antenna signals, the determined selection state is determined according to the selection state of the selection phase. The selected state includes a locked state and an unlocked state. When the selection state is determined according to the θ^々 selection state, when it is determined that the selected state of e e is the unlocked state, the selection phase of e e is determined to be the training phase; When it is determined that the selected state of e c is the locked state, the selection phase of determining θ ε is an alternate training phase and working phase. In this case, when the corresponding column phase rotation is performed on the m virtual antenna signals of the n virtual antenna signals, θ can be used. In the selection phase, the column phase rotation is performed. Optionally, as another embodiment, the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
在根据 θ。的选择阶段, 进行列相位旋转时, 在训练阶段中, 周期性地更 新 θ。的取值, 并按照更新后的 θ。进行列相位旋转; 在工作阶段中的至少部 分时间内, 使用固定的 θε进行列相位旋转。 Under θ. In the selection phase, when the column phase rotation is performed, θ is periodically updated in the training phase. Value, and follow the updated θ. Perform column phase rotation; use at a fixed θ ε for column phase rotation for at least part of the working phase.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 存储器 960还存储使得 MIMO信号处理器 940或处理单元 950执行以下过程的指令: Optionally, as another embodiment, the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
在训练阶段中, 获取每个更新后的 0。下 MIMO用户设备对应上报的单 流信道质量指示 CQI; 根据 MIMO用户设备对应上报的单流 CQI获取最优 列相位; 当训练阶段期满时,根据最优列相位确定是否进行选择状态的迁移。 In the training phase, get 0 after each update. The unicast channel quality indicator CQI corresponding to the MIMO user equipment is obtained; the optimal column phase is obtained according to the single stream CQI reported by the MIMO user equipment; when the training phase expires, whether the selection state transition is performed according to the optimal column phase is determined.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 存储器 960还存储使得 MIMO信号处理器 940或处理单元 950执行以下过程的指令: Optionally, as another embodiment, the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
在根据 MIMO用户设备对应上报的单流 CQI获取最优列相位时, 对当 前 ec下获取的单流 CQI进行求和得到第一总和值, 对当前 ec下获取的单流 CQI 进行计数得到第一计数值; 根据第一总和值和第一计数值得到当前 的锁定性能值和失锁性能值; 在遍历所有 之后, 将所有 中锁定性能值 最大的 θε确定为最优列相位。 When the optimal column phase is obtained according to the single-stream CQI reported by the MIMO user equipment, the single stream CQI obtained by the current e c is summed to obtain a first sum value, and the single stream CQI obtained under the current e c is counted. The first count value; the current lock performance value and the lock-loss performance value are obtained according to the first sum value and the first count value; after traversing all, the θ ε having the largest lock-in performance value is determined as the optimal column phase.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 存储器 960还存储使得 MIMO信号处理器 940或处理单元 950执行以下过程的指令: Optionally, as another embodiment, the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
在根据第一总和值和第一计数值得到当前 的锁定性能值和失锁性能 值时, 将第一总和值除以第一计数值得到第一平均值; 对第一平均值进行预 处理得到锁定性能值和失锁性能值。 When the current lock performance value and the lockout performance value are obtained according to the first sum value and the first count value, the first average value is divided by the first count value to obtain a first average value; and the first average value is preprocessed Lock performance values and lockout performance values.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 存储器 960还存储使得 MIMO信号处理器 940或处理单元 950执行以下过程的指令: Optionally, as another embodiment, the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
在对第一平均值进行预处理得到锁定性能值和失锁性能值时,对第一平 均值进行 Alpha滤波得到锁定性能值和失锁性能值。 When the first average value is preprocessed to obtain the lock performance value and the lockout performance value, the first average value is subjected to Alpha filtering to obtain the lock performance value and the lock loss performance value.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 存储器 960还存储使得 MIMO信号处理器 940或处理单元 950执行以下过程的指令: Optionally, as another embodiment, the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
当训练阶段期满时, 在根据最优列相位确定是否进行选择状态的迁移 时, 如果当前的选择状态为失锁态: When the training phase expires, when determining whether to perform the migration of the selected state according to the optimal column phase, if the current selection state is the unlocked state:
当最优列相位的锁定性能值不低于所有 的锁定性能值的平均值与第
一阈值之和并且最优列相位的失锁性能值不低于所有 的失锁性能值的平 均值与第二阈值之和时, 确定选择状态从失锁态迁移至锁定态; When the optimal column phase lock performance value is not lower than the average value of all lock performance values Determining the selected state from the unlocked state to the locked state when the sum of the thresholds and the value of the optimal column phase of the loss of lock performance are not lower than the sum of the average of all the lockout performance values and the second threshold;
当最优列相位的锁定性能值低于所有 的锁定性能值的平均值与第一 阈值之和或者最优列相位的失锁性能值低于所有 的失锁性能值的平均值 与第二阈值之和时, 确定选择状态不迁移。 When the optimal column phase lock performance value is lower than the sum of the average of all the lock performance values and the first threshold or the optimal column phase lock loss performance value is lower than the average value and the second threshold of all the lockout performance values When the sum is selected, it is determined that the selection state is not migrated.
或者, 如果当前的选择状态为锁定态: Or, if the current selection state is locked:
当最优列相位的失锁性能值低于所有 的失锁性能值的平均值与第三 阈值之和时, 确定选择状态从锁定态迁移至失锁态; Determining that the selected state transitions from the locked state to the unlocked state when the loss of the optimal column phase is lower than the sum of the average of all the loss-of-lock performance values and the third threshold;
当最优列相位的失锁性能值不低于所有 θε的失锁性能值的平均值与第 三阈值之和时, 确定选择状态不迁移, 根据最优列相位确定下一工作阶段中 使用的固定的 θ^々取值。 When the unlocking performance value of the optimal column phase is not lower than the sum of the average value of the lock-loss performance values of all θ ε and the third threshold, it is determined that the selected state does not migrate, and the next stage is determined according to the optimal column phase. The fixed θ^ value.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 存储器 960还存储使得 ΜΙΜΟ信号处理器 940或处理单元 950执行以下过程的指令: Optionally, as another embodiment, the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
在根据最优列相位确定下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 θ。的取值时,当最 优列相位和上一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec之间的差异大于第四阈值时,将 最优列相位作为下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec; 否则将上一工作阶段中使 用的固定的 ec作为下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec。 The fixed θ used in the next working phase is determined based on the optimal column phase. When the value is different, when the difference between the optimal column phase and the fixed e c used in the previous working phase is greater than the fourth threshold, the optimal column phase is taken as the fixed e c used in the next working phase; otherwise, a session using the fixed e c e c a constant used in the next phase.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 存储器 960还存储使得 MIMO信号处理器 940或处理单元 950执行以下过程的指令: Optionally, as another embodiment, the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
将最优列相位作为下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec时,在下一工作阶段 的初始一段时间内,逐步地将列相位从训练阶段的列相位结束更新值变化至 最优列相位。 When the optimal column phase is used as the fixed e c used in the next working phase, the column phase is gradually changed from the column phase end update value of the training phase to the optimal column phase during the initial period of the next working phase.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 存储器 960还存储使得 MIMO信号处理器 940或处理单元 950执行以下过程的指令: Optionally, as another embodiment, the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
当工作阶段期满时, 进入训练阶段。 When the work phase expires, enter the training phase.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 存储器 960还存储使得 MIMO信号处理器 940或处理单元 950执行以下过程的指令: Optionally, as another embodiment, the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
当工作阶段期满时, 进入训练阶段, 在训练阶段的初始一段时间内, 逐 步地将列相位从工作阶段中使用的固定的 0C变化至训练阶段的列相位初始 更新值。 When the working phase expires, the training phase is entered, and during the initial period of the training phase, the column phase is gradually changed from the fixed 0 C used in the working phase to the column phase initial update value in the training phase.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 发射电路 920可将 n个输出信号中的 k个输
出信号进行相应的行相位旋转, 得到 k个第二旋转信号, 其中 k为正整数; 对未进行行相位旋转的 n-k个输出信号和 k个第二旋转信号进行功放处理以 得到 n个物理天线信号。 Optionally, as another embodiment, the transmitting circuit 920 can input k out of the n output signals. The output signal is rotated by the corresponding line phase to obtain k second rotation signals, where k is a positive integer; power processing is performed on nk output signals and k second rotation signals that are not phase-rotated to obtain n physical antennas signal.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 发射电路 920可在对 n个虚拟天线信号中的 m个虚拟天线信号进行相应的列相位旋转时, 将 k个输出信号与 e 相乘, 其中, 为与 k个输出信号相应的行相位, r为虚拟天线信号的序号, re [l,k]。 Optionally, as another embodiment, the transmitting circuit 920 may multiply the k output signals by e when performing corresponding column phase rotation on the m virtual antenna signals of the n virtual antenna signals, where The corresponding line phase of k output signals, r is the sequence number of the virtual antenna signal, re [l, k].
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 存储器 960还存储使得 MIMO信号处理器 940或处理单元 950执行以下过程的指令: Optionally, as another embodiment, the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
确定 {θ 组合的选择状态, 根据 {ee, 组合的选择状态确定 {ee, 组 合的选择阶段。上述 组合的选择状态包括锁定态和失锁态。在根据 {ec, er}组合的选择状态确定 {θ 组合的选择阶段时, 当确定 {θ 组合的选择 状态为失锁态时, 确定 组合的选择阶段为训练阶段; 当确定 组 合的选择状态为锁定态时, 确定 {θε, 组合的选择阶段为交替的训练阶段和 工作阶段。在此情况下,对 n个虚拟天线信号中的 m个虚拟天线信号进行相 应的列相位旋转时, 可根据 {ee, ej组合的选择阶段进行列相位旋转。 同理, 上述对 n个输出信号中的 k个输出信号进行相应的行相位旋转时,可根据 {θ0, 组合的选择阶段进行列相位旋转。 Determine the selection state of the {θ combination, and determine {e e , the selection phase of the combination according to {e e , the selected selection state. The selected states of the above combinations include a locked state and an unlocked state. When the selection phase of the {θ combination is determined according to the selection state of the {e c , e r } combination, when it is determined that the selection state of the {θ combination is the unlocked state, the selection phase of the combination is determined as the training phase; when the selection of the combination is determined When the state is the locked state, {θ ε is determined, and the selected selection phase is the alternating training phase and working phase. In this case, when the corresponding column phase rotation is performed on the m virtual antenna signals among the n virtual antenna signals, the column phase rotation can be performed according to the selection phase of the {e e , ej combination. Similarly, when the corresponding line phase rotation is performed on the k output signals of the n output signals, the column phase rotation can be performed according to the selection phase of {θ 0 .
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 存储器 960还存储使得 MIMO信号处理器 940或处理单元 950执行以下过程的指令: Optionally, as another embodiment, the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
当根据 {θ。, 组合的选择阶段, 进行列相位旋转和行相位旋转时, 在训 练阶段中, 周期性地更新 组合的取值, 并按照更新后的 组合进 行列相位旋转和行相位旋转; 在工作阶段中的至少部分时间内, 使用固定的 {θ0, er}组合进行列相位旋转和行相位旋转。 When according to {θ. During the selection phase of the combination, when the column phase rotation and the row phase rotation are performed, in the training phase, the combined values are periodically updated, and the column phase rotation and the row phase rotation are performed according to the updated combination; At least part of the time, column phase rotation and row phase rotation are performed using a fixed combination of {θ 0 , e r }.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 存储器 960还存储使得 MIMO信号处理器 940或处理单元 950执行以下过程的指令: Optionally, as another embodiment, the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
在训练阶段中,获取每个更新后的 {θ。, 组合下 MIMO用户设备对应上 报的单流信道质量指示 CQI; 根据 MIMO用户设备对应上报的单流 CQI获 取最优 {ee, ej组合; 当训练阶段期满时, 根据最优 {ee, ej组合确定是否进行 选择状态的迁移。 In the training phase, each updated {θ is obtained. Combining the single stream quality indicator CQI corresponding to the reported MIMO user equipment; obtaining the optimal {e e , ej combination according to the single stream CQI reported by the MIMO user equipment; when the training phase expires, according to the optimal {e e , The ej combination determines whether to perform the migration of the selected state.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 存储器 960还存储使得 MIMO信号处理器 Optionally, as another embodiment, the memory 960 also stores the MIMO signal processor.
940或处理单元 950执行以下过程的指令:
当根据 MIMO用户设备对应上报的单流 CQI获取最优列相位时, 对当 前 {θ 组合下获取的单流 CQI进行求和得到第二总和值, 对当前 {θ ΘΓ} 组合下获取的单流 CQI进行计数得到第二计数值;根据第二总和值和第二计 数值得到当前 组合的锁定性能值和失锁性能值; 在遍历所有 {θ 组 合之后,将所有 组合中锁定性能值最大的 组合确定为最优 ΘΓ} 组合。 940 or processing unit 950 executes instructions of the following process: When the optimal column phase is obtained according to the single-stream CQI reported by the MIMO user equipment, the single-stream CQI obtained under the current {θ combination is summed to obtain a second sum value, and the current order is obtained under the combination of the current {θ Θ Γ } The stream CQI is counted to obtain a second count value; the current combined lock performance value and the lockout performance value are obtained according to the second sum value and the second count value; after traversing all {θ combinations, the lock performance value of all combinations is maximized It is determined as the optimum combination Θ Γ} composition.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 存储器 960还存储使得 ΜΙΜΟ信号处理器 940或处理单元 950执行以下过程的指令: Optionally, as another embodiment, the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
在根据第二总和值和第二计数值得到当前 { , 组合的锁定性能值和 失锁性能值时, 将第二总和值除以第二计数值得到第二平均值,; 对第二平 均值进行预处理得到锁定性能值和失锁性能值。 可选地, 当第二计数值为 0 时, 可以将第二平均值设为 0。 When the current { , combined locking performance value and the lost lock performance value are obtained according to the second sum value and the second count value, the second average value is divided by the second count value to obtain a second average value; Pre-processing is performed to obtain the lock performance value and the lock-loss performance value. Alternatively, when the second count value is 0, the second average value may be set to zero.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 存储器 960还存储使得 MIMO信号处理器 940或处理单元 950执行以下过程的指令: Optionally, as another embodiment, the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
对第二平均值进行预处理得到锁定性能值和失锁性能值时,对第二平均 值进行 Alpha滤波得到锁定性能值和失锁性能值。 When the second average value is preprocessed to obtain the lock performance value and the lockout performance value, the second average value is subjected to Alpha filtering to obtain the lock performance value and the lockout performance value.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 存储器 960还存储使得 MIMO信号处理器 940或处理单元 950执行以下过程的指令: Optionally, as another embodiment, the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
当训练阶段期满时, 根据最优 组合确定是否进行选择状态的迁移 时, 如果当前的选择状态为失锁态: When the training phase expires, it is determined whether to perform the migration of the selected state according to the optimal combination, if the current selection state is the unlocked state:
当最优 { , 组合的锁定性能值不低于所有 { , 组合的锁定性能值 的平均值与第一阈值之和并且最优列相位的失锁性能值不低于所有 { , er} 组合的失锁性能值的平均值与第二阈值之和时,确定选择状态从失锁态迁移 至锁定态; When the optimal { , the combined locking performance value is not lower than all { , the sum of the average of the combined locking performance values and the first threshold and the optimal column phase of the lost lock performance value is not lower than all { , e r } combinations When the average value of the loss-of-lock performance value is equal to the second threshold, it is determined that the selected state transitions from the unlocked state to the locked state;
当最优 { , 组合的锁定性能值低于所有 { , 组合的锁定性能值的 平均值与第一阈值之和或者最优 { , 组合的失锁性能值低于所有 { , er} 组合的失锁性能值的平均值与第二阈值之和时, 确定选择状态不迁移。 When the optimal { , the combined locking performance value is lower than all { , the sum of the combined locking performance value and the first threshold or the optimal { , the combined loss-of-lock performance value is lower than all { , e r } combinations When the average value of the lockout performance value is equal to the second threshold, it is determined that the selected state does not migrate.
或者, 如果当前的选择状态为锁定态: Or, if the current selection state is locked:
当最优 { , 组合的失锁性能值低于所有 { , 组合的失锁性能值的 平均值与第三阈值之和时, 确定选择状态从锁定态迁移至失锁态; When the optimal { , the combined loss-of-lock performance value is lower than the sum of all { , the combined average value of the lost lock performance value and the third threshold, determining that the selected state transitions from the locked state to the unlocked state;
当最优 { , 组合的失锁性能值不低于所有 { , 组合的失锁性能值
的平均值与第三阈值之和时, 确定选择状态不迁移, 根据最优 组合确 定下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 {Θ 组合的取值。 When the optimal { , combined loss of lock performance value is not lower than all { , combined loss of lock performance value When the average value is equal to the third threshold, it is determined that the selected state is not migrated, and the value of the fixed {Θ combination used in the next working phase is determined according to the optimal combination.
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 存储器 960还存储使得 MIMO信号处理器 940或处理单元 950执行以下过程的指令: Optionally, as another embodiment, the memory 960 also stores instructions that cause the MIMO signal processor 940 or the processing unit 950 to perform the following process:
在根据最优 {ec, 组合确定下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 {θ 组合 的取值时, 当最优 {ec, 组合和上一工作阶段中使用的固定的 {ec, 组合之 间的差异大于第四阈值时, 将最优 {θ Θγ}组合作为下一工作阶段中使用的固 定的 组合; 否则将上一工作阶段中使用的固定的 {θ 组合作为下一 工作阶段中使用的固定的 {ec, er}组合。 When determining the value of the fixed {θ combination used in the next working phase according to the optimal {e c , the combination is the optimal {e c , the combination and the fixed {e c used in the previous working phase. When the difference between the differences is greater than the fourth threshold, the optimal {θ Θ γ } is combined as a fixed combination used in the next working phase; otherwise, the fixed {θ combination used in the previous working phase is taken as the next working phase. A fixed combination of {e c , e r } used in .
可选地, 作为另一实施例, 上述列相位的取值范围小于行相位的取值范 围。 Optionally, as another embodiment, the range of values of the column phase is smaller than the range of values of the row phase.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到, 结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各 示例的单元及算法步骤, 能够以电子硬件、 或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结 合来实现。 这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行, 取决于技术方案的特 定应用和设计约束条件。 专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方 法来实现所描述的功能, 但是这种实现不应认为超出本发明的范围。 Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the elements and algorithm steps of the various examples described in connection with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in a combination of electronic hardware or computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the solution. A person skilled in the art can use different methods for implementing the described functions for each particular application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of the present invention.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到, 为描述的方便和筒洁, 上述描 述的系统、 装置和单元的具体工作过程, 可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应 过程, 在此不再赘述。 It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that, for the convenience of the description and the cleaning process, the specific operation of the system, the device and the unit described above may be referred to the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中, 应该理解到, 所揭露的系统、 装置和 方法, 可以通过其它的方式实现。 例如, 以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示 意性的, 例如, 所述单元的划分, 仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分, 实际实现时可 以有另外的划分方式, 例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个 系统, 或一些特征可以忽略, 或不执行。 另一点, 所显示或讨论的相互之间 的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口, 装置或单元的间接耦合 或通信连接, 可以是电性, 机械或其它的形式。 In the several embodiments provided herein, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative. For example, the division of the unit is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not executed. In addition, the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, device or unit, and may be electrical, mechanical or otherwise.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作 为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元, 即可以位于一个地方, 或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或 者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。 The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separate, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solution of the embodiment.
另外, 在本发明各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元
中, 也可以是各个单元单独物理存在, 也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一 个单元中。 In addition, each functional unit in various embodiments of the present invention may be integrated into one processing unit In addition, each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使 用时, 可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。 基于这样的理解, 本发明 的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部 分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质 中, 包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机, 服务器, 或者网络设备等)执行本发明各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。 而前 述的存储介质包括: U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器( ROM, Read-Only Memory )、 随机存取存储器(RAM, Random Access Memory ), 磁碟或者光盘等各种可 以存储程序代码的介质。 The functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as separate products, may be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on such understanding, the technical solution of the present invention, which is essential to the prior art or part of the technical solution, may be embodied in the form of a software product stored in a storage medium, including The instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of the present invention. The foregoing storage medium includes: a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk or an optical disk, and the like, which can store program codes. .
以上所述, 仅为本发明的具体实施方式, 但本发明的保护范围并不局限 于此, 任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本发明揭露的技术范围内, 可轻易 想到变化或替换, 都应涵盖在本发明的保护范围之内。 因此, 本发明的保护 范围应所述以权利要求的保护范围为准。
The above is only the specific embodiment of the present invention, but the scope of the present invention is not limited thereto, and any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope of the present invention. It should be covered by the scope of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the invention should be determined by the scope of the claims.
Claims
1、 一种多入多出 MIMO信号处理方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 对 n个虚拟天线信号中的 m个虚拟天线信号进行相应的列相位旋转,得 到 m个第一旋转信号, 其中所述虚拟天线信号是将 MIMO信号乘以预编码 矩阵得到的, n、 m为整数, 且 l≤m≤n; 1. A multiple-input multiple-output MIMO signal processing method, characterized by: performing corresponding column phase rotation on m virtual antenna signals among n virtual antenna signals to obtain m first rotation signals, wherein The virtual antenna signal is obtained by multiplying the MIMO signal by the precoding matrix, n and m are integers, and l≤m≤n;
将未进行列相位旋转的 n-m个虚拟天线信号以及所述 m个第一旋转信 号, 与 nxn的虚拟天线映射矩阵相乘, 得到 n个输出信号, 所述 n个输出信 号用于得到 n个物理天线信号。 Multiply the n-m virtual antenna signals without column phase rotation and the m first rotation signals with the nxn virtual antenna mapping matrix to obtain n output signals. The n output signals are used to obtain n physical antenna signal.
2、 如权利要求 1所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述对 n个虚拟天线信号 中的 m个虚拟天线信号进行相应的列相位旋转, 包括: 2. The method of claim 1, wherein performing corresponding column phase rotation on m virtual antenna signals among n virtual antenna signals includes:
将所述 m个虚拟天线信号与 ^相乘, 其中, ec为与所述 m个虚拟天 线信号相应的列相位, c为虚拟天线信号的序号, c E [l ,m]。 The m virtual antenna signals are multiplied by ^, where ec is the column phase corresponding to the m virtual antenna signals, c is the serial number of the virtual antenna signal, c E [l, m ].
3、 如权利要求 2所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述对 n个虚拟天线信 号中的 m个虚拟天线信号进行相应的列相位旋转之前, 还包括: 3. The method according to claim 2, characterized in that, before performing corresponding column phase rotation on the m virtual antenna signals among the n virtual antenna signals, it further includes:
确定所述 ee的选择状态, 所述 ee的选择状态包括锁定态和失锁态; 当确定所述 ee的选择状态为失锁态时, 确定所述 ee的选择阶段为训练 阶段; 或者, 当确定所述 ec的选择状态为锁定态时, 确定所述 ec的选择阶 段为交替的训练阶段和工作阶段, Determine the selection state of the ee , and the selection state of the ee includes a locked state and an out-of-lock state; when it is determined that the selection state of the ee is an out-of-lock state, determine the selection phase of the ee as the training phase ; Or, when it is determined that the selection state of the ec is a locked state, it is determined that the selection phase of the ec is an alternating training phase and a working phase,
其中,所述对 η个虚拟天线信号中的 m个虚拟天线信号进行相应的列相 位旋转, 包括: 根据所述0(;的选择阶段, 进行所述列相位旋转。 Wherein, performing corresponding column phase rotation on m virtual antenna signals among n virtual antenna signals includes: performing the column phase rotation according to the selection stage of 0 ( ;.
4、 如权利要求 3所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述根据所述 ec的选择阶 段, 进行所述列相位旋转, 包括: 4. The method of claim 3, wherein performing the column phase rotation according to the selection stage of the EC includes:
在所述训练阶段中, 周期性地更新 θε的取值, 并按照更新后的 θε进行 所述列相位旋转; In the training phase, the value of θ ε is updated periodically, and the column phase rotation is performed according to the updated θ ε ;
在所述工作阶段中的至少部分时间内,使用固定的 ec进行所述列相位旋 转。 The column phase rotation is performed using a fixed ec during at least part of the working phase.
5、 如权利要求 4所述的方法, 其特征在于, 还包括: 5. The method of claim 4, further comprising:
在所述训练阶段中, 获取每个更新后的 θ。下 MIMO用户设备对应上报 的单流信道质量指示 CQI; During the training phase, each updated θ is obtained. The single-stream channel quality indicator CQI reported by the MIMO user equipment;
根据所述 MIMO用户设备对应上报的单流 CQI获取最优列相位;
当所述训练阶段期满时,根据所述最优列相位确定是否进行所述选择状 态的迁移。 Obtain the optimal column phase according to the single-stream CQI correspondingly reported by the MIMO user equipment; When the training phase expires, it is determined according to the optimal column phase whether to perform the transition of the selected state.
6、 如权利要求 5所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述根据所述 MIMO用户 设备对应上报的单流 CQI获取最优列相位, 包括: 6. The method according to claim 5, wherein the obtaining the optimal column phase according to the single-stream CQI correspondingly reported by the MIMO user equipment includes:
对当前 ec下获取的单流 CQI进行求和得到第一总和值, 对当前 ec下获 取的单流 CQI进行计数得到第一计数值; Sum the single-flow CQI obtained under the current e c to obtain the first sum value, and count the single-flow CQI obtained under the current e c to obtain the first count value;
根据所述第一总和值和第一计数值得到所述当前 的锁定性能值和失 锁性能值; Obtain the current locking performance value and the lock-out performance value according to the first sum value and the first count value;
在遍历所有 θ。之后, 将所有 θ。中锁定性能值最大的 θ。确定为所述最优 列相位。 while traversing all θ. After that, all θ. θ with the largest locking performance value. Determine the optimal column phase.
7、 如权利要求 6所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述根据所述第一总和值 和第一计数值得到所述当前 的锁定性能值和失锁性能值, 包括: 7. The method of claim 6, wherein obtaining the current locking performance value and the lock-out performance value based on the first sum value and the first count value includes:
将所述第一总和值除以所述第一计数值得到第一平均值; Divide the first sum value by the first count value to obtain a first average value;
对所述第一平均值进行预处理得到所述锁定性能值和失锁性能值。 The first average value is preprocessed to obtain the locking performance value and the lock-out performance value.
8、 如权利要求 6或 7所述的方法, 其特征在于, 当所述训练阶段期满 时, 根据所述最优列相位确定是否进行所述选择状态的迁移, 包括: 8. The method according to claim 6 or 7, characterized in that, when the training phase expires, determining whether to perform the migration of the selected state according to the optimal column phase includes:
如果当前的选择状态为失锁态: If the current selection state is out of lock:
当所述最优列相位的锁定性能值不低于所有 的锁定性能值的平均值 与第一阈值之和并且所述最优列相位的失锁性能值不低于所有 的失锁性 能值的平均值与第二阈值之和时, 确定所述选择状态从失锁态迁移至锁定 态; When the locking performance value of the optimal column phase is not lower than the sum of the average of all locking performance values and the first threshold and the out-of-lock performance value of the optimal column phase is not lower than the sum of all the out-of-lock performance values When the sum of the average value and the second threshold is determined, it is determined that the selected state has migrated from the unlocked state to the locked state;
当所述最优列相位的锁定性能值低于所有 的锁定性能值的平均值与 第一阈值之和或者所述最优列相位的失锁性能值低于所有 的失锁性能值 的平均值与第二阈值之和时, 确定所述选择状态不迁移; 或者, When the locking performance value of the optimal column phase is lower than the sum of the average of all locking performance values and the first threshold or the out-of-lock performance value of the optimal column phase is lower than the average of all out-of-lock performance values and the second threshold, it is determined that the selection state does not migrate; or,
如果当前的选择状态为锁定态: If the current selection status is locked:
当所述最优列相位的失锁性能值低于所有 的失锁性能值的平均值与 第三阈值之和时, 确定所述选择状态从锁定态迁移至失锁态; When the out-of-lock performance value of the optimal column phase is lower than the sum of the average of all out-of-lock performance values and the third threshold, determine that the selection state migrates from the locked state to the out-of-lock state;
当所述最优列相位的失锁性能值不低于所有 的失锁性能值的平均值 与第三阈值之和时, 确定所述选择状态不迁移, 根据所述最优列相位确定下 一工作阶段中使用的所述固定的 ec的取值。 When the out-of-lock performance value of the optimal column phase is not lower than the sum of the average of all out-of-lock performance values and the third threshold, it is determined that the selection state does not migrate, and the next step is determined based on the optimal column phase The value of the fixed e c used in the work phase.
9、 如权利要求 8所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述根据所述最优列相位
确定下一工作阶段中使用的所述固定的 ec的取值, 包括: 9. The method according to claim 8, characterized in that: according to the optimal column phase Determine the value of the fixed e c used in the next work stage, including:
当所述最优列相位和上一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec之间的差异大于 第四阈值时, 将所述最优列相位作为下一工作阶段中使用的所述固定的 ec; 否则将所述上一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec作为下一工作阶段中使用的固 定的 ec。 When the difference between the optimal column phase and the fixed e c used in the previous working stage is greater than the fourth threshold, the optimal column phase is used as the fixed e c used in the next working stage. ; Otherwise, use the fixed ec used in the previous working stage as the fixed ec used in the next working stage.
10、 如权利要求 9所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述将所述最优列相位作 为下一工作阶段中使用的所述固定的 ec, 包括: 10. The method of claim 9, wherein using the optimal column phase as the fixed ec used in the next working stage includes:
在所述下一工作阶段的初始一段时间内,逐步地将列相位从所述训练阶 段的列相位结束更新值变化至所述最优列相位。 In the initial period of the next working phase, the column phase is gradually changed from the column phase end update value of the training phase to the optimal column phase.
11、 如权利要求 4-10任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 还包括: 当所述工作阶段期满时, 进入所述训练阶段。 11. The method according to any one of claims 4 to 10, further comprising: entering the training phase when the working phase expires.
12、 如权利要求 11 所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述当所述工作阶段期 满时, 进入所述训练阶段, 包括: 12. The method of claim 11, wherein when the working phase expires, entering the training phase includes:
在所述训练阶段的初始一段时间内,逐步地将列相位从所述工作阶段中 使用的固定的 ee变化至所述训练阶段的列相位初始更新值。 During the initial period of the training phase, the column phase is gradually changed from the fixed e e used in the working phase to the initial update value of the column phase of the training phase.
13、 如权利要求 2所述的方法, 其特征在于, 还包括: 13. The method of claim 2, further comprising:
将所述 n个输出信号中的 k个输出信号进行相应的行相位旋转, 得到 k 个第二旋转信号, 其中 k为正整数; Perform corresponding row phase rotation on k output signals among the n output signals to obtain k second rotation signals, where k is a positive integer;
对未进行行相位旋转的 n-k个输出信号和所述 k个第二旋转信号进行功 放处理以得到所述 n个物理天线信号。 The n-k output signals without horizontal phase rotation and the k second rotation signals are subjected to power amplifier processing to obtain the n physical antenna signals.
14、 如权利要求 13所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述将所述 n个输出信 号中的 k个输出信号进行相应的行相位旋转, 包括: 14. The method of claim 13, wherein performing corresponding row phase rotation on k output signals among the n output signals includes:
将所述 k个输出信号与 ^相乘, 其中, ^为与所述 k个输出信号相应 的行相位, r为虚拟天线信号的序号, r E [l ,k]。 The k output signals are multiplied by ^, where ^ is the row phase corresponding to the k output signals, r is the serial number of the virtual antenna signal, r E [l,k].
15、 如权利要求 14所述的方法, 其特征在于, 还包括: 15. The method of claim 14, further comprising:
确定所述 {0e, 组合的选择状态, 所述 {0e, 组合的选择状态包括锁定 态和失锁态; Determine the selection state of the {0 e , combination, and the selection state of the {0 e , combination includes a locked state and an unlocked state;
当确定所述 {ee, 组合的选择状态为失锁态时, 确定所述 {ee, 组合的 选择阶段为训练阶段;或者, 当确定所述 {Θ^, Θ^组合的选择状态为锁定态时, 确定所述 组合的选择阶段为交替的训练阶段和工作阶段, When it is determined that the selection state of the {e e , combination is an out-of-lock state, it is determined that the selection phase of the {e e , combination is the training phase; or, when it is determined that the selection state of the {Θ^, Θ^ combination is When in the locked state, the selection phase of the combination is determined to be the alternating training phase and working phase,
其中, 根据所述 组合的选择阶段, 进行所述列相位旋转和所述行
相位旋转。 Wherein, according to the selection stage of the combination, the column phase rotation and the row phase rotation are performed Phase rotation.
16、 如权利要求 15所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述根据所述 {θ 组 合的选择阶段, 进行所述列相位旋转和所述行相位旋转, 包括: 16. The method of claim 15, wherein performing the column phase rotation and the row phase rotation according to the selection stage of the {θ combination includes:
在所述训练阶段中, 周期性地更新 {Θ }组合的取值, 并按照更新后的 {θ0, 组合进行所述列相位旋转和所述行相位旋转; In the training phase, the value of the {θ } combination is updated periodically, and the column phase rotation and the row phase rotation are performed according to the updated {θ 0 , combination;
在所述工作阶段中的至少部分时间内, 使用固定的 {θ 组合进行所述 列相位旋转和所述行相位旋转。 The column phase rotation and the row phase rotation are performed using a fixed {θ combination during at least part of the working phase.
17、 如权利要求 16所述的方法, 其特征在于, 还包括: 17. The method of claim 16, further comprising:
在所述训练阶段中,获取每个更新后的 {θ 组合下 MIMO用户设备对 应上报的单流信道质量指示 CQI; In the training phase, obtain the single-stream channel quality indicator CQI reported by the MIMO user equipment under each updated {θ combination;
根据所述 MIMO用户设备对应上报的单流 CQI获取最优 {0C, 0r}组合; 当所述训练阶段期满时, 根据所述最优 组合确定是否进行所述选 择状态的迁移。 Obtain the optimal {0 C , 0 r } combination according to the single-stream CQI correspondingly reported by the MIMO user equipment; when the training phase expires, determine whether to migrate the selection state according to the optimal combination.
18、 如权利要求 17所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述根据所述 MIMO用 户设备对应上报的单流 CQI获取最优列相位, 包括: 18. The method of claim 17, wherein the obtaining the optimal column phase according to the single-flow CQI correspondingly reported by the MIMO user equipment includes:
对当前 {ec, 组合下获取的单流 CQI进行求和得到第二总和值,对当前 {θ0, er}组合下获取的单流 CQI进行计数得到第二计数值; Sum the single-flow CQI obtained under the current {e c , combination to obtain the second sum value, and count the single-flow CQI obtained under the current {θ 0 , e r } combination to obtain the second count value;
根据所述第二总和值和第二计数值得到所述当前 { , 组合的锁定性 能值和失锁性能值; Obtain the current { , combined locking performance value and lock-out performance value according to the second sum value and the second count value;
在遍历所有 {θ^, 组合之后,将所有 {θ^, 组合中锁定性能值最大的 {ec: 组合确定为所述最优 {θ 组合。 After traversing all {θ^, combinations, the {e c: combination with the largest locking performance value among all {θ^, combinations is determined as the optimal {θ combination.
19、 如权利要求 18所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述根据所述第二总和 值和第二计数值得到所述当前 { , 组合的锁定性能值和失锁性能值, 包 括: 19. The method according to claim 18, characterized in that, obtaining the current { , combined locking performance value and loss-of-locking performance value according to the second sum value and the second count value includes:
将所述第二总和值除以所述第二计数值得到第二平均值; Divide the second sum value by the second count value to obtain a second average value;
对所述第二平均值进行预处理得到所述锁定性能值和失锁性能值。 The second average value is preprocessed to obtain the locking performance value and the lock-out performance value.
20、 如权利要求 18或 19所述的方法, 其特征在于, 当所述训练阶段期 满时, 根据所述最优 {ee, ej组合确定是否进行所述选择状态的迁移, 包括: 如果当前的选择状态为失锁态: 20. The method according to claim 18 or 19, characterized in that, when the training phase expires, determining whether to perform the migration of the selection state according to the optimal {e e , ej combination includes: if The current selection state is out of lock:
当所述最优 { , 组合的锁定性能值不低于所有 { , 组合的锁定性 能值的平均值与第一阈值之和并且所述最优列相位的失锁性能值不低于所
有 { , 0J组合的失锁性能值的平均值与第二阈值之和时, 确定所述选择状态 从失锁态迁移至锁定态; When the optimal { , the combined locking performance value is not lower than that of all { , the sum of the average locking performance value of the combination and the first threshold and the lock-out performance value of the optimal column phase is not lower than the When there is { , the sum of the average value of the out-of-lock performance value of the 0J combination and the second threshold, it is determined that the selected state migrates from the out-of-lock state to the locked state;
当所述最优 { , 组合的锁定性能值低于所有 { , 组合的锁定性能 值的平均值与第一阈值之和或者所述最优 { , 组合的失锁性能值低于所 有 { , 组合的失锁性能值的平均值与第二阈值之和时, 确定所述选择状态 不迁移; 或者, When the locking performance value of the optimal { , combination is lower than that of all { , combinations, the sum of the average locking performance value of the combination and the first threshold or the lock-out performance value of the optimal { , combination is lower than that of all { , combinations When the sum of the average value of the lock-out performance value and the second threshold is determined, it is determined that the selected state does not migrate; or,
如果当前的选择状态为锁定态: If the current selection status is locked:
当所述最优 { , 组合的失锁性能值低于所有 { , 组合的失锁性能 值的平均值与第三阈值之和时, 确定所述选择状态从锁定态迁移至失锁态; 当所述最优 { , 组合的失锁性能值不低于所有 { , 组合的失锁性 能值的平均值与第三阈值之和时, 确定所述选择状态不迁移, 根据所述最优 {θ0, 组合确定下一工作阶段中使用的所述固定的 {ec, 组合的取值。 When the out-of-lock performance value of the optimal { , combination is lower than the sum of the average out-of-lock performance value of all { , combinations and the third threshold, it is determined that the selection state migrates from the locked state to the out-of-lock state; when When the optimal { , the combined out-of-lock performance value is not lower than the sum of the average of the combined out-of-lock performance values of all { , and the third threshold, it is determined that the selection state will not migrate, according to the optimal {θ 0 , the combination determines the value of the fixed { ec , combination used in the next work stage.
21、如权利要求 20所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述根据所述最优 {ee, ej 组合确定下一工作阶段中使用的所述固定的 {ec, 组合的取值, 包括: 21. The method according to claim 20, characterized in that, determining the value of the fixed { ec , combination used in the next working stage according to the optimal {e e , ej combination includes: :
当所述最优 {ec, 组合和上一工作阶段中使用的固定的 {ec, 组合之 间的差异大于第四阈值时, 将所述最优 {ec, er}组合作为下一工作阶段中使用 的所述固定的 {θ 组合; 否则将所述上一工作阶段中使用的固定的 {θ ΘΓ} 组合作为下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 {θ 组合。 When the difference between the optimal { ec , combination and the fixed { ec , combination used in the previous work stage is greater than the fourth threshold, the optimal { ec , er } combination is used as the next The fixed {θ combination used in one working stage; otherwise, the fixed {θ Θ Γ } combination used in the previous working stage is used as the fixed {θ combination used in the next working stage.
22、 如权利要求 13-21任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述列相位的 取值范围小于所述行相位的取值范围且所述列相位的量化精度大于所述行 相位的量化精度。 22. The method according to any one of claims 13 to 21, wherein the value range of the column phase is smaller than the value range of the row phase and the quantization accuracy of the column phase is greater than the row phase. quantification accuracy.
23、 一种多入多出 MIMO信号处理装置, 其特征在于, 包括: 第一旋转单元,用于对 n个虚拟天线信号中的 m个虚拟天线信号进行相 应的列相位旋转, 得到 m 个第一旋转信号, 其中所述虚拟天线信号是将 MIMO信号乘以预编码矩阵得到的, n、 m为整数, 且 l≤m≤n; 23. A multiple-input multiple-output MIMO signal processing device, characterized in that it includes: a first rotation unit, used to perform corresponding column phase rotation on the m virtual antenna signals among the n virtual antenna signals to obtain the mth A rotation signal, wherein the virtual antenna signal is obtained by multiplying the MIMO signal by the precoding matrix, n and m are integers, and l≤m≤n;
第一矩阵单元,用于将未进行列相位旋转的 n-m个虚拟天线信号以及所 述 m个第一旋转信号, 与 nxn的虚拟天线映射矩阵相乘, 得到 n个输出信 号, 所述 n个输出信号用于得到 n个物理天线信号。 The first matrix unit is used to multiply the n-m virtual antenna signals without column phase rotation and the m first rotation signals with the nxn virtual antenna mapping matrix to obtain n output signals, the n outputs The signal is used to obtain n physical antenna signals.
24、 如权利要求 23所述的 MIMO信号处理装置, 其特征在于, 所述第 一旋转单元具体用于将所述 m个虚拟天线信号与 ^相乘, 其中, 0C为与所 述 m个虚拟天线信号相应的列相位, c为虚拟天线信号的序号, c E [l,m]。
24. The MIMO signal processing device according to claim 23 , wherein the first rotation unit is specifically configured to multiply the m virtual antenna signals by The corresponding column phase of the virtual antenna signal, c is the serial number of the virtual antenna signal, c E [l, m ].
25、 如权利要求 24所述的 MIMO信号处理装置, 其特征在于, 还包括 第一确定单元, 用于确定所述 θ。的选择状态, 所述 θ。的选择状态包括锁定 态和失锁态, 25. The MIMO signal processing device according to claim 24, further comprising a first determining unit configured to determine the θ. The selection state of θ. The selection state includes locked state and unlocked state.
所述第一确定单元还用于当确定所述 θ。的选择状态为失锁态时,确定所 述 θ。的选择阶段为训练阶段; 或者当确定所述 θ。的选择状态为锁定态时, 确定所述 θ。的选择阶段为交替的训练阶段和工作阶段, The first determining unit is also used to determine the θ. When the selection state of is the out-of-lock state, determine the θ. The selection phase is the training phase; or when determining the θ. When the selected state is the locked state, determine the θ. The selection stage is the alternating training stage and work stage,
其中, 所述第一旋转单元具体用于根据所述 θ。的选择阶段, 进行所述列 相位旋转。 Wherein, the first rotation unit is specifically used according to the θ. During the selection phase, the column phase rotation is performed.
26、 如权利要求 25所述的 MIMO信号处理装置, 其特征在于, 所述第 一旋转单元具体用于在所述训练阶段中, 周期性地更新 θ0的取值, 并按照更 新后的 ec进行所述列相位旋转; 在所述工作阶段中的至少部分时间内,使用 固定的 ec进行所述列相位旋转。 26. The MIMO signal processing device according to claim 25, wherein the first rotation unit is specifically configured to periodically update the value of θ 0 during the training phase, and according to the updated e c performs the column phase rotation; and performs the column phase rotation using a fixed e c during at least part of the working phase.
27、如权利要求 26所述的 MIMO信号处理装置, 其特征在于,还包括: 第一获取单元,用于在所述训练阶段中,获取每个更新后的 θ。下 MIMO 用户设备对应上报的单流信道质量指示 CQI; 并根据所述 MIMO用户设备 对应上报的单流 CQI获取最优列相位; 27. The MIMO signal processing device according to claim 26, further comprising: a first acquisition unit, configured to acquire each updated θ in the training phase. Download the single-stream channel quality indicator CQI reported by the MIMO user equipment; and obtain the optimal column phase according to the single-stream CQI reported by the MIMO user equipment;
第二确定单元, 用于当所述训练阶段期满时, 根据所述最优列相位确定 是否进行所述选择状态的迁移。 The second determination unit is configured to determine whether to perform the transition of the selection state according to the optimal column phase when the training phase expires.
28、 如权利要求 27所述的 MIMO信号处理装置, 其特征在于, 所述第 一获取单元具体用于对当前 ec下获取的单流 CQI进行求和得到第一总和值, 对当前 下获取的单流 CQI进行计数得到第一计数值; 根据所述第一总和 值和第一计数值得到所述当前 的锁定性能值和失锁性能值;在遍历所有 ec 之后, 将所有 ec中锁定性能值最大的 ec确定为所述最优列相位。 28. The MIMO signal processing device according to claim 27, wherein the first acquisition unit is specifically configured to sum the single-stream CQI acquired under the current ec to obtain a first sum value, and obtain the first sum value under the current ec The single-flow CQI is counted to obtain the first count value; the current locking performance value and the lock-out performance value are obtained according to the first sum value and the first count value; after traversing all ec , The e c with the largest locking performance value is determined as the optimal column phase.
29、 如权利要求 28所述的 MIMO信号处理装置, 其特征在于, 所述第 一获取单元具体用于将所述第一总和值除以所述第一计数值得到第一平均 值; 对所述第一平均值进行预处理得到所述锁定性能值和失锁性能值。 29. The MIMO signal processing device according to claim 28, wherein the first acquisition unit is specifically configured to divide the first sum value by the first count value to obtain a first average value; The first average value is preprocessed to obtain the locking performance value and the lock-out performance value.
30、 如权利要求 28或 29所述的 MIMO信号处理装置, 其特征在于, 如果当前的选择状态为失锁态: 30. The MIMO signal processing device according to claim 28 or 29, characterized in that, if the current selection state is an out-of-lock state:
所述第二确定单元具体用于当所述最优列相位的锁定性能值不低于所 有 ec的锁定性能值的平均值与第一阈值之和并且所述最优列相位的失锁性 能值不低于所有 的失锁性能值的平均值与第二阈值之和时,确定所述选择
状态从失锁态迁移至锁定态; 当所述最优列相位的锁定性能值低于所有 的锁定性能值的平均值与第一阈值之和或者所述最优列相位的失锁性能值 低于所有 的失锁性能值的平均值与第二阈值之和时,确定所述选择状态不 迁移; 或者, The second determination unit is specifically used when the locking performance value of the optimal column phase is not lower than the sum of the average locking performance value of all e c and the first threshold and the lock-out performance of the optimal column phase The selection is determined when the value is not lower than the sum of the average of all out-of-lock performance values and the second threshold The state transitions from the unlocked state to the locked state; when the locking performance value of the optimal column phase is lower than the sum of the average of all locking performance values and the first threshold or the locking performance value of the optimal column phase is low When the sum of the average value of all lock-out performance values and the second threshold is determined, it is determined that the selected state does not migrate; or,
如果当前的选择状态为锁定态: If the current selection status is locked:
所述第二确定单元具体用于当所述最优列相位的失锁性能值低于所有 ec的失锁性能值的平均值与第三阈值之和时, 确定所述选择状态从锁定态迁 移至失锁态;当所述最优列相位的失锁性能值不低于所有 的失锁性能值的 平均值与第三阈值之和时, 确定所述选择状态不迁移, 根据所述最优列相位 确定下一工作阶段中使用的所述固定的 ec的取值。 The second determination unit is specifically configured to determine that the selection state changes from the locked state when the out-of-lock performance value of the optimal column phase is lower than the sum of the average of the out-of-lock performance values of all e c and the third threshold. Migrate to the out-of-lock state; when the out-of-lock performance value of the optimal column phase is not lower than the sum of the average of all out-of-lock performance values and the third threshold, it is determined that the selected state does not migrate, according to the optimal column phase The optimal column phase determines the value of the fixed e c used in the next working stage.
31、 如权利要求 30所述的 MIMO信号处理装置, 其特征在于, 所述第 二确定单元具体用于当所述最优列相位和上一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec 之间的差异大于第四阈值时,将所述最优列相位作为下一工作阶段中使用的 所述固定的 ec;否则将所述上一工作阶段中使用的固定的 ec作为下一工作阶 段中使用的固定的 ec。 31. The MIMO signal processing device according to claim 30, wherein the second determination unit is specifically used to determine the difference between the optimal column phase and the fixed e c used in the previous working stage. When it is greater than the fourth threshold, the optimal column phase is used as the fixed e c used in the next working stage; otherwise, the fixed e c used in the previous working stage is used as the fixed e c used in the next working stage. fixed e c .
32、如权利要求 24所述的 MIMO信号处理装置, 其特征在于,还包括: 第二旋转单元,用于将所述 n个输出信号中的 k个输出信号进行相应的 行相位旋转, 得到 k个第二旋转信号, 其中 k为正整数; 32. The MIMO signal processing device according to claim 24, further comprising: a second rotation unit, configured to perform corresponding row phase rotation on k output signals among the n output signals, to obtain k a second rotation signal, where k is a positive integer;
其中未进行行相位旋转的 n-k个输出信号和所述 k个第二旋转信号作为 所述 n个物理天线信号。 The n-k output signals without row phase rotation and the k second rotation signals are used as the n physical antenna signals.
33、 如权利要求 32所述的 MIMO信号处理装置, 其特征在于, 所述第 二旋转单元具体用于将所述 k个输出信号与 ^相乘, 其中, 0r为与所述 k 个输出信号相应的行相位, r为虚拟天线信号的序号, r E [l ,k]。 33. The MIMO signal processing device according to claim 32, wherein the second rotation unit is specifically configured to multiply the k output signals by The corresponding row phase of the signal, r is the serial number of the virtual antenna signal, r E [l,k].
34、 如权利要求 33所述的 MIMO信号处理装置, 其特征在于, 还包括 第三确定单元, 用于确定所述 {θ。, 0r}组合的选择状态, 所述 {θ。, 0r}组合的选 择状态包括锁定态和失锁态, 34. The MIMO signal processing device according to claim 33, further comprising a third determining unit configured to determine {θ. , 0 r } combination of selection states, the {θ. , 0 r } The selection state of the combination includes locked state and unlocked state,
所述第三确定单元还用于当确定所述 {θ^, er}组合的选择状态为失锁态 时, 确定所述 组合的选择阶段为训练阶段; 或者当确定所述 组 合的选择状态为锁定态时, 确定所述 {θε, 组合的选择阶段为交替的训练阶 段和工作阶段, The third determination unit is also configured to determine that the selection phase of the combination is a training phase when it is determined that the selection state of the {θ^, er } combination is an out-of-lock state; or when it is determined that the selection state of the combination When in the locked state, determine the {θ ε , and the combined selection phase is the alternating training phase and working phase,
其中所述第一旋转单元根据所述 {θ er}组合的选择阶段进行所述列相
位旋转, 并且所述第二旋转单元根据所述 er}组合的选择阶段进行所述行 相位旋转。 wherein the first rotation unit performs the column phase according to the selection stage of the {θ e r } combination. bit rotation, and the second rotation unit performs the row phase rotation according to the selection stage of the er } combination.
35、 如权利要求 34所述的 MIMO信号处理装置, 其特征在于, 所述第 一旋转单元具体用于在所述训练阶段中, 周期性地更新 {θ。, er}组合的取值, 并按照更新后的 {θ。, 组合进行所述列相位旋转; 或者在所述工作阶段中的 至少部分时间内, 使用固定的 {θ 组合进行所述列相位旋转; 35. The MIMO signal processing device according to claim 34, wherein the first rotation unit is specifically configured to periodically update {θ during the training phase. , e r } combination value, and according to the updated {θ. , perform the column phase rotation in combination; or use a fixed {θ combination to perform the column phase rotation during at least part of the working phase;
所述第二旋转单元具体用于在所述训练阶段中, 周期性地更新 {θ 组 合的取值, 并按照更新后的 组合进行所述行相位旋转; 或者在所述工 作阶段中的至少部分时间内, 使用固定的 {ec, 组合进行所述行相位旋转。 The second rotation unit is specifically configured to periodically update the value of the {θ combination during the training phase, and perform the row phase rotation according to the updated combination; or at least part of the working phase Within time, the row phase rotation is performed using a fixed combination of {e c , .
36、 如权利要求 35所述的 MIMO信号处理装置, 其特征在于, 还包括 第二获取单元, 用于在所述训练阶段中, 获取每个更新后的 {θ 组合下 36. The MIMO signal processing device according to claim 35, further comprising a second acquisition unit configured to acquire each updated {θ combination in the training phase.
MIMO用户设备对应上报的单流信道质量指示 CQI, 并根据所述 MIMO用 户设备对应上报的单流 CQI获取最优 {ec, er}组合; The MIMO user equipment reports the single-stream channel quality indicator CQI correspondingly, and obtains the optimal { ec , er } combination according to the single-stream CQI reported correspondingly by the MIMO user equipment;
第三确定单元, 用于当所述训练阶段期满时, 根据所述最优 组合 确定是否进行所述选择状态的迁移。 The third determination unit is configured to determine whether to perform the migration of the selection state according to the optimal combination when the training phase expires.
37、 如权利要求 36所述的 MIMO信号处理装置, 其特征在于, 所述第 二获取单元具体用于对当前 {0C, 0r}组合下获取的单流 CQI进行求和得到第 二总和值, 对当前 {θ 组合下获取的单流 CQI进行计数得到第二计数值; 根据所述第二总和值和第二计数值得到所述当前 { , 组合的锁定性能值 和失锁性能值; 在遍历所有 {Θ Θ j组合之后, 将所有 {ee, ej组合中锁定性能 值最大的 组合确定为所述最优 {θ 组合。 37. The MIMO signal processing device according to claim 36, wherein the second acquisition unit is specifically configured to sum the single-stream CQI acquired under the current {0 C , 0 r } combination to obtain a second sum. value, count the single-flow CQI obtained under the current {θ combination to obtain a second count value; obtain the locking performance value and loss-of-lock performance value of the current { , combination according to the second sum value and the second count value; After traversing all {Θ Θ j combinations, the combination with the largest locking performance value among all {e e , ej combinations is determined as the optimal {θ combination.
38、 如权利要求 37所述的 MIMO信号处理装置, 其特征在于, 所述第 二获取单元具体用于将所述第二总和值除以所述第二计数值得到第二平均 值; 对所述第二平均值进行预处理得到所述锁定性能值和失锁性能值。 38. The MIMO signal processing device according to claim 37, wherein the second acquisition unit is specifically configured to divide the second sum value by the second count value to obtain a second average value; The second average value is preprocessed to obtain the locking performance value and the lock-out performance value.
39、 如权利要求 37或 38所述的 MIMO信号处理装置, 其特征在于, 如果当前的选择状态为失锁态: 39. The MIMO signal processing device according to claim 37 or 38, characterized in that, if the current selection state is an out-of-lock state:
所述第三确定单元具体用于当所述最优 { , 组合的锁定性能值不低 于所有 { , 组合的锁定性能值的平均值与第一阈值之和并且所述最优列 相位的失锁性能值不低于所有 { , 组合的失锁性能值的平均值与第二阈 值之和时, 确定所述选择状态从失锁态迁移至锁定态; 当所述最优 {ee, er}组 合的锁定性能值低于所有 { , er}组合的锁定性能值的平均值与第一阈值之
和或者所述最优 { , 组合的失锁性能值低于所有 { , 组合的失锁性能 值的平均值与第二阈值之和时, 确定所述选择状态不迁移; 或者, The third determination unit is specifically used when the optimal { , the combined locking performance value is not lower than the sum of the average value of the combined locking performance values of all { , the first threshold and the loss of the optimal column phase. When the lock performance value is not lower than the sum of the average of the lock-out performance values of all { , combinations and the second threshold, it is determined that the selection state migrates from the lock-out state to the lock state; when the optimal {e e , e The locking performance value of r } combination is lower than the average of the locking performance value of all { , e r } combinations and the first threshold. and or when the out-of-lock performance value of the optimal { , combination is lower than the sum of the average out-of-lock performance value of all { , combinations and the second threshold, it is determined that the selected state does not migrate; or,
如果当前的选择状态为锁定态: If the current selection status is locked:
所述第三确定单元具体用于当所述最优 { , 组合的失锁性能值低于 所有 { , 组合的失锁性能值的平均值与第三阈值之和时, 确定所述选择状 态从锁定态迁移至失锁态; 当所述最优 { , 组合的失锁性能值不低于所有 {θ0, 组合的失锁性能值的平均值与第三阈值之和时, 确定所述选择状态不 迁移, 根据所述最优 {ec, 组合确定下一工作阶段中使用的所述固定的 {ec, 组合的取值。 The third determination unit is specifically configured to determine that the selection state changes from the sum of the average value of the out-of-lock performance values of all { , combinations and the third threshold when the optimal { , combined out-of-lock performance value is lower than the sum of the combined out-of-lock performance values of all { , The locked state migrates to the out-of-lock state; when the out-of-lock performance value of the optimal { , combination is not lower than the sum of the average out-of-lock performance value of all {θ 0 , combinations and the third threshold, the selection is determined The state does not migrate, and the value of the fixed { ec , combination used in the next work stage is determined according to the optimal { ec , combination.
40、 如权利要求 39所述的 MIMO信号处理装置, 其特征在于, 所述第 三确定单元具体用于当所述最优 {ec, 组合和上一工作阶段中使用的固定 的 {θ 组合之间的差异大于第四阈值时, 将所述最优 {θ。, er}组合作为下一 工作阶段中使用的所述固定的 {θ Θγ}组合; 否则将所述上一工作阶段中使用 的固定的 {θ 组合作为下一工作阶段中使用的固定的 {ec, 组合。 40. The MIMO signal processing device according to claim 39, wherein the third determination unit is specifically used to determine when the optimal { ec , combination is the fixed {θ combination used in the previous working stage. When the difference between is greater than the fourth threshold, the optimal {θ. , e r } combination is used as the fixed {θ Θ γ } combination used in the next work stage; otherwise, the fixed {θ combination used in the previous work stage is used as the fixed {θ γ } combination used in the next work stage. {e c , combination.
41、 一种基站, 其特征在于, 包括如权利要求 23-40任一项所述的多入 多出 MIMO信号处理装置。
41. A base station, characterized by comprising the multiple-input multiple-output MIMO signal processing device according to any one of claims 23-40.
Priority Applications (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CN201380001364.5A CN103718475B (en) | 2013-09-18 | 2013-09-18 | Multiple input multiple output signal processing method, device and base station |
PCT/CN2013/083757 WO2015039298A1 (en) | 2013-09-18 | 2013-09-18 | Multiple input multiple output signal processing method, apparatus and base station |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2013/083757 WO2015039298A1 (en) | 2013-09-18 | 2013-09-18 | Multiple input multiple output signal processing method, apparatus and base station |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2015039298A1 true WO2015039298A1 (en) | 2015-03-26 |
Family
ID=50409489
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2013/083757 WO2015039298A1 (en) | 2013-09-18 | 2013-09-18 | Multiple input multiple output signal processing method, apparatus and base station |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
CN (1) | CN103718475B (en) |
WO (1) | WO2015039298A1 (en) |
Families Citing this family (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
EP3506523A4 (en) * | 2016-09-19 | 2019-08-07 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Signal transmission method and base station |
CN109587731B (en) | 2017-09-29 | 2020-12-22 | 成都华为技术有限公司 | Information processing method and related equipment |
EP3732795A4 (en) * | 2017-12-28 | 2021-08-04 | Nokia Solutions and Networks Oy | Method and apparatus for signal detection in a mimo communication system |
CN110247734B (en) * | 2019-06-18 | 2021-11-23 | 合肥奕斯伟集成电路有限公司 | Data transmission method and device and electronic equipment |
Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN101635612A (en) * | 2009-08-18 | 2010-01-27 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Precoding code book constructing method and precoding code book constructing device of multi-input multi-output system |
CN101854712A (en) * | 2010-06-18 | 2010-10-06 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method, device and base station for balancing powers betweenantennas |
CN103095420A (en) * | 2011-11-01 | 2013-05-08 | 华为技术有限公司 | Precoding control indication feedback method and user device and base station |
-
2013
- 2013-09-18 CN CN201380001364.5A patent/CN103718475B/en active Active
- 2013-09-18 WO PCT/CN2013/083757 patent/WO2015039298A1/en active Application Filing
Patent Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN101635612A (en) * | 2009-08-18 | 2010-01-27 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Precoding code book constructing method and precoding code book constructing device of multi-input multi-output system |
CN101854712A (en) * | 2010-06-18 | 2010-10-06 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method, device and base station for balancing powers betweenantennas |
CN103095420A (en) * | 2011-11-01 | 2013-05-08 | 华为技术有限公司 | Precoding control indication feedback method and user device and base station |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
CN103718475B (en) | 2017-04-26 |
CN103718475A (en) | 2014-04-09 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
JP7522150B2 (en) | Method for reporting channel state information in large-scale antenna systems | |
JP6446419B2 (en) | Method and apparatus for determining a plurality of MIMO layers | |
US20150333885A1 (en) | Beam Forming Using a Dual Polarized Antenna Arrangement | |
CN102714530A (en) | Feedback for supporting SU-MIMO and MU-MIMO operation in wireless communication | |
WO2017152747A1 (en) | Csi feedback method, precoding method, and apparatus | |
KR102417324B1 (en) | A Simplified Detection Scheme for Spatial Modulation and Space-Time Block Coding with Antenna Selection | |
TW201208283A (en) | Methods providing precoder feedback using multiple precoder indices and related communications devices and systems | |
WO2017152785A1 (en) | Csi feedback method, precoding method, and apparatus | |
TW201126943A (en) | Feedback mechanisms for beamforming operation | |
WO2015180178A1 (en) | Method and device for reporting channel status information (csi), and base station antenna | |
WO2015039298A1 (en) | Multiple input multiple output signal processing method, apparatus and base station | |
WO2014135993A1 (en) | Method, apparatus and computer program for controlling a wireless device | |
WO2017167156A1 (en) | Dmrs transmission method and device | |
WO2011134246A1 (en) | Method and device for obtaining channel information and codebook construction method | |
CN103718584A (en) | Data transmission method and system, transmitter, and receiver | |
WO2012062122A1 (en) | Method and terminal for feeding back channel state information | |
WO2018228214A1 (en) | Method for transmitting channel state information, access network device and terminal device | |
US20150078490A1 (en) | Methods and user equipment in a wireless communication network | |
WO2023051413A1 (en) | Network device, beamforming method, and wireless communication system | |
WO2017133688A1 (en) | Method and device for transmitting information and method and device for receiving information | |
WO2013001837A1 (en) | Receiving device and buffer control method | |
TWI572092B (en) | Wireless communication device and method for controlling antenna array | |
JP4903805B2 (en) | Antenna array calibration for multi-input multi-output wireless communication systems | |
WO2020107188A1 (en) | Data processing method, device and storage medium | |
JP6257805B2 (en) | Information feedback method, terminal, base station, communication system and storage medium |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 13893702 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 13893702 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |